JP7517830B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There are pachinko gaming machines that enhance the interest of gaming by using a so-called variable display game, in which a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and when the gaming medium enters a winning area such as a winning hole provided in the gaming area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, multiple types of identification information (hereinafter, display patterns) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined gaming value is awarded is determined based on the display result. In such pachinko gaming machines, when the stopped pattern pattern when the variable display of the display pattern in the variable display game completely stops becomes a specific display pattern, a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) is reached that is advantageous to the player. In the jackpot gaming state, a round game in which the big winning hole is open can be repeatedly played up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the big prize opening opens earlier than the timing of switching the display of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-104625 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the possibility of winning in the big prize slot increases when the gaming medium is released before the number of rounds is displayed, this is still not sufficient from the viewpoint of optimally displaying the number of balls won, and there is a risk that this will cause anxiety to the player and reduce their interest in the game.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of shooting gaming media at specific intervals, variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, and deriving and displaying a display result, and is capable of being controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect as a variable display, in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggested performance execution means capable of executing a suggested performance that suggests that the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies that the specific performance identification information has been temporarily stopped,
When the round of play is being played, a given amount display regarding the given amount of gaming value is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined display is not displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount, and a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed;
The predetermined period is a period not longer than the specific interval,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance.
It is characterized by:
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of releasing gaming media at specific intervals, variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information, and deriving and displaying display results, and is capable of being controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect in which, as a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, the specific effect is resumed after temporarily suspending the display of special identification information different from the effect identification information;
A suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies the user that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped,
When the round of play is being played, a given amount display regarding the given amount of gaming value is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined display is not displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount, and a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed;
The predetermined period is a period not longer than the specific interval,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance.
It is characterized by:
Furthermore, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) to derive and display a display result, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) favorable to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of "0000");
moreover,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a portion in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game from being felt without causing anxiety to the player. Furthermore, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of elation at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In order to achieve the above objective, other gaming machines:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the game medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display),
moreover,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) that temporarily stops special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then resumes the variable display is a specific effect (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying a converging line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the converging line at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a part in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the temporary stop suggestive effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the concentrated lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game from being felt without causing anxiety to the player. Furthermore, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of elation at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the following means A to B. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing variable display of decorative symbols (effect identification information) as shown in JP2016-131876A, and capable of executing pseudo consecutive effects (specific effects) including temporary stopping of pseudo consecutive symbols (specific effect identification information) and re-variable display during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

However, because no special effects are performed when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, not only is it not possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping, but it is also not possible to heighten the player's sense of excitement at the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping.

This invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can heighten players' expectations and increase their sense of excitement.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) to derive and display a display result, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) favorable to a player,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a portion in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of means B is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) that temporarily stops special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then resumes the variable display is a specific effect (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying a converging line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the converging line at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a part in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the concentrated lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

The invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention, or it may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of a state in which a game ball is caught in a special variable winning ball device. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the operation of a second movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on the image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on the image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a reserved memory of a jackpot, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a reserved memory of a losing result. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is an explanatory diagram of each performance period and performance content in the pseudo consecutive performance. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance decision process (for use when executing pseudo consecutive performances), and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing whether or not a preview performance will be executed and the decision ratio of the preview performance to be executed. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance decision process (for use when pseudo consecutive performances are not being executed), and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing whether or not a preview performance will be executed and the decision ratio of the preview performances to be executed. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the special temporary stop notification effect execution decision ratio, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the temporary stop notification effect period decision ratio. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker. A figure showing the display mode of each image during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not stop. A figure showing the display mode of each image during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. This is an explanatory diagram of the change in visibility of the left and right decorative patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance period and the temporary stop notification performance period. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on the image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on the image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on the image display device. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. 13 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device in a modified example. FIG. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the transparency of convergent lines and effect images in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left part, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left part, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right part, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right part. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2. In addition, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R parts corresponding to each other. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. In addition, lamps 9g near the general winning openings are provided near the three general winning openings 10 located at the lower left of the game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lamp below the display device 9f, and the lamp near the general winning opening 9g may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lamp below the display device 9f, and the lamp near the general winning opening 9g are each composed of an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through a passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If a game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get prize balls by making the game ball enter the large prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot game state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is shot into the right-side game area so that the game ball enters the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period in which the attacker is opened in the first round of play, and if the attacker is not won within the predetermined period, a predetermined display is made to indicate that the number of winning balls has not increased, and if the attacker is won within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. Below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

Figure 10-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, and shows an example of the lighting when all of the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, are lit. In the feature part 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display bottom lamp 9f (left display bottom lamp 9fL, right display bottom lamp 9fR), and general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g, are lit in sequence from the lower left to the lower right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right.

Figure 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a jackpot start presentation waiting time is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time may be set in a game control process timer provided in RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the winning start designation command may be stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. After that, the big win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the probability change state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, a process of clearing the special chart change count counter for counting the number of times the special chart game is executed in the probability change state or the time-saving state, etc. may be executed. Then, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process of the large prize opening (step 042AKS006), and the special pattern stop process is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on or not (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the waiting time for the small win start presentation is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS008, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for the small win start presentation may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similar to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 042AKS012). After executing either the processing of step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, a judgment is made as to whether or not to end the special pattern state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the value of the special pattern change count counter (special pattern change count value) is updated, for example, by subtracting or adding 1, and a judgment is made as to whether or not the updated special pattern change count value matches a predetermined special game state end judgment value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end judgment value, the special pattern state or the time-saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the special pattern state flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, etc. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end judgment value, the state of the special game state flag or time-saving flag is maintained, and the processing of step 042AKS013 is terminated. After such a judgment of the end of the special game state or time-saving state is executed, the special symbol stop processing is terminated. The end judgment based on the special symbol change count value may be performed only when the time-saving state is in effect, and the special game state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot." Alternatively, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for judging the end of the special game state may be extracted from a random counter provided in RAM 102, and a judgment of whether or not to end the special game state may be made by referring to a table for deciding the end of the special game state previously stored in ROM 101 or the like.

Figure 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S114 of Figure 6 as a jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot start flag is on or not (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 6. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is judged whether the jackpot start performance is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot start performance waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the processing of step S312, if the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (such as "0"), it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is currently waiting, and if it does match, it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is not currently waiting.

If the jackpot start time performance is on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; Yes), the game control process timer value is updated, for example by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), and the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot start time performance is not on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), the large prize opening count counter is cleared (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the type of jackpot, but for example, if there is a "sudden" jackpot type, it may be set to a different opening control pattern than the "probable" or "non-probable" jackpot types. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable" or "non-probable", it may be set to a different opening control pattern depending on the jackpot type, for example, different opening control patterns may be set for the "probable" and "non-probable" jackpot types.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting to open the big prize opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next opening wait end judgment value, and if they do not match, it is determined that the game is waiting for the next opening, while if they match, it is determined that the game is not waiting for the next opening. If the game is waiting for the next opening in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), proceed to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the big prize in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the time set as the interval time between each round in the post-big prize opening process in step S116 in FIG. 6.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the machine is not waiting for the next opening (step 042AKS027; No), the machine performs settings to open the large prize opening in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large prize opening number counter (step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value determined in advance in accordance with the large prize opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, and the large prize opening opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for which the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, is set. In addition, the solenoid drive signal for a specified large prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a specified solenoid circuit, and the large prize opening door solenoid is set to the ON state to open the large prize opening.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value of the special prize opening counter is between "1" and "15," the timer initial value corresponding to a special prize opening opening time of 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a command to specify that the large prize opening is in progress to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the processing of step 042AKS029, the large prize opening count value is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the processing during the large prize opening (step 042AKS031), and the processing before the large prize opening is terminated.

Figure 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S115 of Figure 6 as the jackpot opening processing. In the jackpot opening processing shown in Figure 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot opening (step 042AKS041), for example, by determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. If no game ball has entered the jackpot opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if a game ball enters the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the winning ball count value by adding 1, and sets the main board 11 to send a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has entered the big prize opening to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS042). The CPU 103 then determines whether the updated winning ball count value has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value has not reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), and then it is determined whether 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS045), for example, depending on whether the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds. At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not passed (step 042AKS045; No), the large prize opening process is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if it is determined in step 042AKS045 that 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS043; Yes), the solenoid for the large prize opening door to close the large prize opening is set to an off state (step 042AKS046), for example by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit, and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command to the performance control board 12 to specify the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS049), and the process during the large prize opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the pre-jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4 (including post-jackpot opening process and jackpot end process) are executed, and various performance control commands such as a win start command, a large prize opening open command, a prize winning command, and a large prize opening open command are set for transmission. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the set performance control commands are transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12, so that the performance control board 12 is aware of each timing such as the start of the jackpot, the opening (start of a round) and closing (end of a round) of the large prize opening, the winning of a prize in the large prize opening, and the end of the jackpot.

Figure 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of various display processes performed in the jackpot performance process of step S176 in Figure 9. In the various display processes shown in Figure 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (step 042AKS051). The jackpot end command is a command sent from the main board 11 when it is determined in the post-jackpot opening process of step S116 in Figure 6 that the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit number of times, and is a command to end the jackpot performance and execute the ending performance.

When it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round (nth round predetermined period has elapsed) (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and with an initial value of "1", it is incremented by one in the processing of step 042AKS066 described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value when the round play starts, and when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round. More specifically, in response to the large prize winning port being completely opened (detection that the large prize winning port door has moved to a position where it is completely open), a large prize winning port open designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the timer value starts counting for the predetermined period from the timing when the command is received.

In the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as described below, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first round of round play, the winning number display, which is a display of the number of balls won, and the round display, which shows the number of rounds, are performed. On the performance control board 12 side, during the period from the big win to the end of the game (the period from the fanfare to the ending), the process of adding 15 to the winning number is continuously performed each time a winning command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning port is received. On the performance control board 12 side, when the winning command is received, a series of processes must first be performed, which are to analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number, and a predetermined period of time is required from the winning to the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes may not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round of round play until the predetermined period has elapsed, and the process of displaying "0000" as the winning number display may not be able to keep up with the winning number display, and "0015" may not be displayed even if the winning number has been won ("0000" is displayed and then "0015", which gives the player a sense of incongruity). Therefore, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is set, and if a game ball that is present at the top of the big winning port at the time of opening wins a prize from the opening to the display of the round number, a period is secured in which "0015" is displayed directly without "0000" being displayed as the winning number display. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when the balls are fired continuously, and even if the period from firing to winning the big winning port is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls fired continuously to win the big winning port is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winning balls that enter the large prize winning slot from the time the winning number is displayed until the winning number is displayed will be one. Therefore, by increasing the number of winning balls before the winning number display or the number of rounds display is performed, it is possible to prevent the winning number display from increasing at the timing when the round number display begins, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Note that, in the example shown, the predetermined period in the characteristic section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, but the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the processing of step 042AKS066, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. In the processing of step 042AKS053, the value of n is checked to determine whether n=1.

If it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 performs a right-hit presentation that suggests to the player that he should hit the right, and controls the operation of a fanfare presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state has been reached (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the n-1R and the number of wins, and controls the operation of the jackpot presentation for that n-1R (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, if n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the processing of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a jackpot performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be preset.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning designation command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning port (step 042AKS056). Note that the processing of step 042AKS056 judges whether or not a winning has occurred from the start of the nth round up to a predetermined period of time. If a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When a winning command is received, that is, when a winning is entered into the big winning slot within a predetermined period from the start of the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is pre-stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the initial value set to "0", and is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of winning balls is counted continuously during the so-called consecutive wins, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the timing when the consecutive wins end. After executing the processing of step 042AKS057, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance lights up the attacca lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner (a manner in which a winning is notified) that is greater than the number of illuminations per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that is illuminated during the performance during a big win. Therefore, it is easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c may also be performed in a manner that the number of illuminations per unit time during the winning hole is greater than the number of illuminations during the performance during a big win. In addition, when a game ball enters the big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated and a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (1R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of balls won is displayed), the number of balls won is updated and displayed (step 042AKS060), and the various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, when updating the number of balls won in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as is, but rather a count-up display (announcement display of an increase in the number of balls won) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) before the number of balls won is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls won is increasing, which can increase the interest in the game.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds and the number of wins corresponding to the nth round, and controls the operation of the presentation during the jackpot of that nth round (step 042AKS061). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the large prize opening before the specified period has elapsed, the number of winnings is increased by "15" in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, a count-up display (announcement display indicating an increase in the number of winnings) is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), and then, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), a winning number display (as a specific display) (display of "0015") other than the specified display indicating that the number of winnings has not increased in this jackpot (if the jackpot is in a winning streak, a display of "15" added to the number of winnings from the previous jackpot can be displayed after the count-up). On the other hand, if no game ball has entered the big prize winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current big win, so as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), a winning number display (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased is performed as a predetermined display (if the game is in a streak, the number of winnings at the previous big win may be displayed as is). In addition to "0000", the winning number display (predetermined display) indicating that the number of winnings has not increased may be displayed as a non-numeric display, such as "---" or "not increased". In addition, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a big win performance, and the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the big win performance, and a performance may be performed in which a predetermined song or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The light-emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win performance may be set in advance. In this way, during the specified period after the big prize opening is opened, i.e., when the winning number display is not being performed, the attacca lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big prize opening. However, when the winning number display is being performed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. Therefore, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the specified period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to enhance the performance after the winning number display after the specified period, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the big prize performance, the performance can be enhanced all at once at the timing when the big prize performance is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). If a winning command has been received, i.e., if a winning has occurred in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS063), lights up the Attacker Trump 9c, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, and performs a count-up display (notification display of an increase in the number of winnings) and then performs a winning number update display that displays the number of winnings (step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command has not been received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the next round after the nth round, the nth+1th round, has started (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be judged by whether the large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the nth+1th round has been received from the main board 11. If the nth+1th round has not started, that is, if the large prize opening designation command has not been received and it remains in the nth round (step 042AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends various display processes as they are. On the other hand, when the n+1R has started, that is, when a command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processes are terminated. For example, when n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that, even if n=2 and it is the second round, until a predetermined period has elapsed, steps 042AKS052 and 053 are judged as No, and in step 042AKS055, a round display corresponding to the first round, which is the n-1R, is performed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after step 042AKS052 is judged as Yes, it is displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that a win end command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the end of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending presentation (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processes.

Next, the display timing and presentation operation examples of the round number display and the number of wins display will be specifically explained with reference to Figs. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows the case of the so-called first win (first big win), not during a consecutive win.

Figure 10-6 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening the big prize opening and the timing of various displays. Figures 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the big prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. As shown in Figures 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative patterns that constitute a big prize is displayed in a stopped state, the big prize game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in Figure 10-7 (b-1), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player that a big prize has been won, various performance effect lamps 9 such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-1). In the illustrated example, the upper row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right until the end of the specified period of the first round (step 042AKS054 in FIG. 10-5). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is sufficiently longer than the specified period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7(c-2), all the effect lamps 9 are turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in the order of the lower left, upper left, center, upper right, and lower right, and a right-hit effect is performed in which "right hit" is displayed in large on the image display device. Note that the small right-hit display displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-hit performance, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (a-3) to Fig. 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 continues to display "right hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. Therefore, the following will explain the order in which the performance effect lamps 9 light up. When the right-hit performance starts, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning entrance vicinity lamp 9g located at the lower left of the play area lights up first, and then the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-4). Next, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-5), the left display device lower lamp 9fL of the display device lower lamps 9f located at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the play board 2 lights up, and then the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-6), and the speaker lamp 9eL corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up as shown in Fig. 10-8 (c-7). In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left to the upper left of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), the large prize opening is closed, so the launched game medium will not enter the large prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7) shows the launched game ball passing through the second path above the large prize opening door and being guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 located in the upper center of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-9), the main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 lights up, causing the performance effect lamp 9 located in the upper center of the pachinko game machine 1 to light up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R lights up, and then, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the upper right lamp 9bR2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper right part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device lower lamp 9fR, which is one of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, lights up. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part, lights up, and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the lower left to the upper left, then the center, then the upper right to the lower right of the pachinko game machine 1, and the performance effect lamps 9 perform a right-hit performance that suggests to the player to hit to the right. In this example, both the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right hit, but either one may be used. In addition, the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and both may be lit independently, simultaneously or with a time lag.

After the right-hit effect on the effect effect lamps 9 has ended, all effect effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues (the right-hit effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the timing for opening the large prize opening comes as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first round starts, and the large prize opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and all the performance effect lamps 9 remain off as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period has elapsed (similar to FIG. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indicators such as luminosity, brightness, and illuminance may be lower than normal. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the large prize opening is opened (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Also, if the effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last to light up, the attacca lamp 9c, is lit, it may be left lit as is, instead of being turned off, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). This makes it possible to make the player aware that the large prize opening has been opened.

When the large prize opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first round, and when the game ball enters the large prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that even if a game ball (a game ball that has been hit quickly) is launched by a right-hit performance before the first round starts (before the large prize opening is opened), it can still win within the predetermined period corresponding to the first round if it is located above the large prize opening at the time the large prize opening is opened. On the side of the performance control board 12, the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 outputs a winning sound as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), and the attacca lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). As described above, the attacca lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times per unit time that the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c emit light during the performance during a big win. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path toward the big winning hole, and is guided to the winning path in which the count switch 23 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning hole door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is less than 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined period. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

After the game ball enters the big prize slot as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after time has passed since the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17) without a prize being won, and a predetermined period of time has passed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19), as shown in FIG. 10-6, it is time to display the number of rounds corresponding to the first round and the big prize performance, and also to display the number of prizes won, so the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big prize hole before the specified period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the round number "1R" is displayed to indicate that it is the first round, and a count-up display is also displayed. At the same time as these displays, as a big win performance (first round performance), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the display of the decorative symbols that constitute the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative symbols that constitute the big win and the display of "BOUNUS" that are displayed as the big win performance (first round performance) are not shown (the same applies to FIG. 10-20 described later), but are displayed in a manner that suggests that the player should hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or right-hit effect is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-2), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is displayed facing forward, and a star-shaped image is displayed above the "B" in the "BOUNUS" display, as a big win effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is tilted toward the back right, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "O" in the "BOUNUS" display. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win faces forward, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot, tilts toward the left rear, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "U" in the "BOUNUS" display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot, faces forward again, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display, and the display returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot performance, the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot is moved toward the right rear, the front, and the left rear, and the star-shaped image is moved from the left character in the "BOUNUS" display to the right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right. The display of the movement of the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot and the shifting display of the star-shaped image are called effect displays, and effect displays also include, for example, a clockwise rotation of a specified image and a character gradually turning to the right. In other words, the effect display should be displayed in a manner that suggests a right hit. In this way, the effect display suggests that a right hit should be made, making it easier to recognize a right hit.

In the big win performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. In this example, it is assumed that a lighting pattern is set to alternately light up the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the winning number display. In this way, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 does not light up until the big win opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up after the winning number display after the predetermined period has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quickly firing and to promote the timing of firing.

On the other hand, if a certain period of time has passed without the game ball entering the big prize slot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that make up the big prize are displayed as a big prize performance (first round performance), "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and a character is displayed, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset light pattern according to the big prize performance.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, the maximum period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached. In addition, with this winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of winnings is displayed as "0150" as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-24). In addition, with this winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). In addition, the maximum period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a period that is sufficient to count from a predetermined period after 10 game balls have entered. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after release, and 28.9 seconds even after the specified period has passed. Since the interval between successive shots is 0.6 seconds, this period is sufficient to allow 10 wins. Therefore, players can feel at ease knowing that there is enough time to win.

When the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, this is the upper limit of the time period during which the big prize opening can be opened, and so the big prize opening is controlled to be closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24). After that, until the second round shown in FIG. 10-6 begins, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). Meanwhile, until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed since n=2), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the round number display and big prize performance corresponding to the first round continue to be performed (the number of wins display is updated according to the wins), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up in response to the big prize performance as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25).

In addition, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the first round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be in a closed state. At this time, the so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the winning number display of "0165" is displayed. In this case, the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are performed after the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the tenth winning, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large prize opening is completely closed to when it becomes open corresponding to the second round. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-winning has occurred in the first round, which can increase the interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is easy to determine which round the winning corresponds to. The winning sound corresponding to an over winning may be a sound (over winning sound) different from the normal winning sound. In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10". The attacca lamp 9c may also be illuminated in a manner corresponding to an over winning, different from the illumination in the normal winning mode.

Then, the timing comes for the large prize opening to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6 in response to the second round, and the large prize opening is controlled to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). At this time, step 042AKS065 in FIG. 10-5 is judged as Yes, that is, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating the start of the n+1th round, is received, and the processing of 042AKS066 is executed, resulting in n=2. At this stage, the processing of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the large prize presentation and round number display corresponding to the first round are performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26) (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, when the big prize opening is completely open and the game ball enters the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), unlike the first round, in the processing of step 042AKS060 in FIG. 10-5, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of winning balls is displayed as "0165" as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, in response to the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit as shown in FIG. 10-13 (c-27). In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the winning occurs during the specified period, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed during the specified period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the round number display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round is performed, and the big win performance corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Also, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed. Also, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big win performance is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the performance effect lamp 9), but the big win performance executed in each round may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9. In this way, the big prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating the second round is displayed, so the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be placed in the big prize opening at an early stage. Therefore, in each round of a multiple round game, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game balls shot in succession being placed in the big prize opening that was opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large prize opening is controlled to open in response to the second round, and as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-29), (b-29), and (c-29), if a predetermined period of time has passed since the large prize opening was completely opened without a game ball winning, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of winnings won in the first round will continue to be displayed as is, as shown in Fig. 10-14 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31). From then on, the same process is performed until the predetermined final round, and when it is determined in step 042AKS051 of Fig. 10-5 that a winning end designation command has been received, a setting is made to end the large prize presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending presentation. In this way, from the second round onwards, if no prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, whereas if a prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won will be added to the number of balls won displayed in the previous round. Therefore, it is easy to recognize a prize in the large prize slot even from the second round onwards.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15. In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next big win (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the game ball will win during the specified period of the first round. In this case, too, the attacca lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), and after the specified period has elapsed, a count-up display is performed and then "0015" is displayed as the winning number display as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21). In such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win again during the specified period (the second ball may win), and in that case, after the specified period has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21), a count-up display is performed, and then the winning number display directly shows "0030" instead of "0000" or "0015". This can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase the interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

The presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If a game ball does not enter the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period indicating that the number of winnings has not increased, and if a game ball enters the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a specific display of the number of winnings different from the predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by displaying a specific display if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of balls won as the predetermined display of "0000", but will directly display the number of balls won as the specific display of "0015". This will prevent confusion for the player and a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a count-up display as a notification display that the number of prizes has increased, and then displays the number of prizes displayed as a special display: "0015." This makes it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and that the number of prizes is increasing.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts counting the timer value for a specified period from the timing when it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, sent from the main board 11 in response to the large prize opening being opened, and displays the number of winnings after the specified period has elapsed. This allows the specified period to be counted appropriately, and a specific display to be made if a prize is won within the specified period, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, by closing the large prize opening door, the pachinko game machine 1 guides the launched game ball through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path, while by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable prize ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for a game ball present in the large prize opening door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within the predetermined period from the opening of the large prize opening, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the presentation control CPU 120 displays to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right-hit presentation as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) during the period from when the jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened. This makes it easier to recognize the playing method and increases the player's interest in the game, as the playing area to be launched during the jackpot is suggested.

The open state of the large prize opening is when the large prize opening is completely open, that is, when the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open. In response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open, a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11. This counts the specified period from when the large prize opening is completely open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, for game balls (fast-hit game balls) that are released by performing a right-hit effect before the start of the first round (before the large prize opening is open), if they are above the large prize opening when the opening is opened, they can win within a specified period corresponding to the first round, and if a prize is won within the specified period, the effect control CPU 120 will display the number of balls won as a special display after the specified period. This prevents game balls that were fast-hit from going to waste.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-15, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a). In this case, when the next big win occurs, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the entry of game balls during the specified period of the first round occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings as a specific display after the specified period has elapsed. This can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation can also execute a fanfare presentation to suggest that a jackpot game state has been reached during the time when the jackpot opening changes from a closed state to an open state. After the jackpot opening is opened and a specified period of time has passed, the number of rounds played can be displayed along with the number of wins, and a jackpot presentation corresponding to round play can be executed. This can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12(b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-12(c-23). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and makes it easier to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period.

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (similar to step 042AKS064) to light up in a manner (a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won) that is greater than the number of times per unit time that game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that light up during the jackpot performance. This makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the jackpot opening, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. This makes it easier to recognize that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, for rounds after the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, as a specific display is made if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, and also increases the possibility of consecutively launched game balls winning a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple round play.

In addition, when a round of play from the second round onwards is being played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large prize opening within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the number of balls won that was displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31), while if the gaming medium enters the large prize opening within the specified period of time, it adds the number of balls won that were awarded in response to that winning to the number of balls displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). This makes it easier to recognize a winning entry into the large prize opening even in the second round onwards.

In addition, even if an over-winning occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) and displays the number of winnings of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are displayed next, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning port is completely closed to when it is opened corresponding to the second round. This makes it easy to determine which opening the winning corresponds to, since the update of the number of winnings display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the number of winnings display at the time of the next opening.

In addition, during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, i.e., when the number of winning balls is not displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 only lights up the attacca lamp 9c when the game ball enters the large prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). However, when the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the presentation effect lamp 9 on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the presentation effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and to enhance the presentation after the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round as shown in FIG. 10-6, and after the big prize opening is opened, the effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit to suggest a right hit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21). This allows the effect lamps 9 to be used to suggest a right hit. Also, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to suggest a right hit after the big prize opening is opened, the last lighted attakka lamp 9c may be left lit as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15) without being turned off, and this allows the player to be aware that the big prize opening has been opened.

In addition, the maximum period for which the big prize opening can be opened is set to a period long enough for 10 game balls to win, even if it is counted from the end of a specified period. This gives players a sense of security because they are guaranteed a sufficient amount of time for a prize to be won.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 does not light up the presentation effect lamp 9 as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, i.e., until the number of winnings is displayed, but instead lights up the presentation effect lamp 9 after the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This makes it possible to restrain the player from firing too quickly and to encourage the timing of firing.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the presentation control CPU 120 illuminates the presentation effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot presentation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This allows the presentation to be instantly livened up at the timing when the jackpot presentation is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the number of winning symbols is displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays a transitional effect display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot in a manner that suggests hitting to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that they should hit to the right, as the effect display suggests that they should hit to the right.

(Modification of characteristic portion 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), after the right-hit effect by the effect effect lamps 9, which indicate that the player should hit the right by lighting up the effect effect lamps 9 in sequence, is completed, all the effect effect lamps 9 are turned off, but this is only one example. For example, after the state shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in Fig. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) may be transitioned to, and at the timing when the large prize winning hole is opened (Fig. 10-16 (b-16A)), the attacca lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 may be turned on as shown in Fig. 10-16 (c-16A). According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the large prize winning hole is opened. The attacca lamp 9c may be continuously turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed or during the opening period.

In the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2", and "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the specified period of the second round has elapsed. However, this is only an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the open state corresponding to the first round ends, that is, when the big prize winning port becomes closed, the "1" in the "1R" display may be erased and only "R" may be displayed. Then, when the specified period of the second round has elapsed, "2" may be displayed, and the round display of "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. The same applies to the second round and after. This allows the end of each round to be visually confirmed, and the game can be made more interesting.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the maximum number of winning balls during the period in which the large winning port can be opened is 10 (the maximum number of winning balls is 10), but for example, the maximum number of winning balls may be set to 1, and if 2 balls are won during the specified period before the number of rounds is displayed, it may be considered an over winning ball. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound may be output as the winning sound for an over winning ball during the specified period, and the attacca lamp 9c may be illuminated in a manner indicating the occurrence of an over winning ball.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the winning number display counted the number of game balls entering the jackpot, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot may also be counted. Note that since right-handed shots are performed during a jackpot, the general winning port into which the winning ball is entered is the general winning port 10 located above the variable winning ball device 6B. Figure 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in which winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that explanations of parts similar to those in Figure 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if a winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if a general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if no winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS059. In addition, when a ball wins at the general winning port 10, a winning sound (different from the winning sound when a ball wins at the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won at the general winning port 10.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won into the general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning into the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS083) and updates and displays the number of balls won (step 042AKS085). Even when updating and displaying the number of balls won in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (announcement display indicating that the number of balls won is increasing) is performed before the number of balls won is displayed. After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if there has been no winning in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a game ball wins in the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won in the general winning port 10.

Next, an example of the performance operation when the winning of the general winning port 10 is also counted will be described with reference to Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the large winning port, and the lighting state of various lamps. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-19 are the same as (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-10. As shown in the figure, when the large winning port is in the open state, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When a game ball enters the general winning port 10, the state transitions to the state shown in Fig. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or if time passes from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17) without the game ball entering either the large prize opening or the general prize opening 10, and a predetermined period of time has passed as shown in FIG. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), if the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10, the state transitions to that shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A) and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), the round number "1R" is displayed to indicate that this is the first round, and a count-up display is also displayed. At the same time as these displays, the jackpot performance (first round performance) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), which includes the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot, the message "BOUNUS in progress," and characters. During the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern for the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of wins.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without a game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), no count-up display is performed, and "0000" is displayed as the winning number display. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display of "1R" is performed to indicate that it is one round, the display of the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot, the display of "BOUNUS" and characters as a jackpot performance (first round performance), and the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 according to a preset lighting pattern according to the jackpot performance.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 10 during the specified period after the big winning port is opened at the start of the first round, as in the above embodiment, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning port 10. Also, if no game balls enter the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number display corresponding to the winning is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning port 10 during the specified period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the gaming medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a win occurs within a specified period, a specific display is displayed, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displays "0015" instead of "0000");
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent players from becoming confused and losing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the game value has been awarded, and then performs a display according to the awarded game value as the specific display (for example, a count-up display which is a notification display indicating that the number of winnings is increasing, and then displays "0015").
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that they have won a prize and the number of prizes they have won is increasing.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The display means starts displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after receiving a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, starts counting a timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving a command to specify that the large winning port is open, which is transmitted from the main board 11 side).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the specified period is counted appropriately, and if a win occurs within the specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variable winning means includes a path forming means including a first path that guides the game medium to the winning path when the first state is reached (for example, by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening), and a second path that guides the game medium to the discharge path when the second state is reached (for example, by closing the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path), and a detection means (for example, a count switch 23, etc.) that is formed within the winning path and detects the winning of the game medium,
The time taken for the game medium to travel from the path forming means to the detection means is within the predetermined period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time taken for a game ball present at the large winning port door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is within the predetermined period of 0.6 seconds, etc.)
This may be done.

This configuration increases the likelihood that a gaming ball present above the large prize opening will be detected within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
After the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state, an operation prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation (for example, during the period from when a jackpot is hit until the big winning port is opened, a right-hit display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-3) to display that the player should hit right),
This may be done.

This configuration suggests the operations that should be performed during advantageous states, making it easier to understand how to play and increasing interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first state is a state in which the variable prize winning door included in the variable prize winning means is completely open (for example, the open state of the large prize winning opening is a state in which the large prize winning opening is completely open, that is, the large prize winning opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, and in response to detecting that the large prize winning opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, a large prize winning opening open command is transmitted from the main board 11 side).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the specified period is counted from when the big prize opening is fully open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
If the game medium launched by the operation prompting display before the start of the first round of play in the advantageous state wins in the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, if a game ball launched by a right-hit performance before the start of the first round is capable of winning at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if the game medium wins within the predetermined period, the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period, etc.)
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent game media that are released before a round of play begins from going to waste.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
In the final round of the multiple rounds in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium being caught when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, in the final round, the big win game state ends with the eleventh game ball caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big win door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15), etc.),
When the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state in the first round of play after the advantageous state is again established, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed if the game medium in the clamped state wins a prize in the variable winning means (for example, when the next jackpot is hit, the game ball wins a prize in a jackpot opening at the start of the first round, and the number of winnings is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the game has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during the time when the large prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect that suggests that the game has entered a large prize game state), and together with the start of the display of the award amount after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round during performance corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large prize opening is opened and a specified period has elapsed, it is possible to display the number of rounds together with the number of prizes won, and execute a large prize during performance corresponding to the round game).

This configuration can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 043AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the game medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display),
A light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9, etc.);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means with a light emission pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium when the game medium wins the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball wins a big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also makes it easier for the player to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period of time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) located near the variable winning means and emitting light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.),
When a game medium wins on the variable winning means, the specific light-emitting means emits light more frequently per unit time than the predetermined light-emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is made to emit light in a manner (a manner in which a win has been notified) that is more frequent than the light emission per unit time of game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that emits light during the performance during a jackpot).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, etc.);
The sound output means includes:
outputting a winning sound corresponding to a winning when the game medium wins on the variable winning means;
The winning sound is output both when the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and when the game medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball enters a large winning hole, the winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 044AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
A round game display capable of identifying the round game being played (for example, displaying the number of rounds) can be displayed;
When the first of the multiple round games is played, the award amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the round number display and the number of wins display are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
When the second or subsequent round game is played among the multiple round games, the round game display corresponding to the second or subsequent round game is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the second round, the round number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the large winning port was opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the gaming medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and increases the chances that consecutively shot game balls will win a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple rounds of play.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the game medium does not win a prize in the variable prize winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable prize winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed (for example, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the game medium does not win a prize in the large prize winning port within a predetermined period of time after the large prize winning port is opened, the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31)).
When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, the amount of the winning amount according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added to the amount of the winning amount displayed in the previous round of play and displayed (for example, if a gaming medium wins in the large winning port within a predetermined period of time, the number of winning balls awarded in response to the winning is added to the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30)).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot even during the second or subsequent rounds of play.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
the display means is capable of updating and displaying the displayed award amount display in response to the winning of the gaming medium on the variable winning means;
The update display of the award amount display is completed once the variable winning means has changed from the first state to the second state, and before it returns to the first state (for example, the count-up display and the winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning port is completely closed to when it becomes an open state corresponding to the second round, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the update of the winning number display when one opening occurs does not overlap with the update of the winning number display when the next opening occurs, making it easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning prize.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 045AK)
The feature portion 042AK includes the following feature portion 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the game medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display),
A plurality of light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9, etc.);
A light emission control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means to emit more light when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the awarded amount before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, i.e., when the number of winnings is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), only the attacca lamp 9c is lit when the game ball enters the large winning hole, but when the number of winnings after the predetermined period is displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and the performance effect lamp 9 is emitted more than during the predetermined period, etc.).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also enhances the presentation after the number of prizes is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is controlled to the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, a right-hit display can be displayed),
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) that is located near the variable winning means and emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (e.g., a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, when the display of the amount of the award before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the specific light-emitting means is illuminated while the specific light-emitting means is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display, and when the display of the amount of the award after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed, the specific light-emitting means and the specific light-emitting means are illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large winning opening is opened, until the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figs. 10-7(c-3) to 10-9(c-13)). As shown in FIG. 10-9(c-15), the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to indicate a right hit, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11(c-20) and (c-21), the effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and after the large winning hole is opened, the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to indicate a right hit, and after the last lit up attacca lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9(c-15), but is left lit.
This may be done.

This configuration can encourage operation using the specified light emitting means, and can also make the player aware that the variable winning means has entered the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media wins, and the game moves to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the maximum period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached).
The time from when the predetermined period has elapsed until when the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number of games (for example, the upper limit period during which the large winning port can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted from when the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win),
This may be done.

This configuration gives players a sense of security because it guarantees them sufficient time to win.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media wins, and the game moves to the next round game (for example, when 10 game balls win, the maximum period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached).
The time from when the predetermined period has elapsed until when the variable winning means enters the second state is a sufficient time for the game medium to win the specific number of games (for example, with respect to the upper limit period during which a large winning port can be opened, the counting from when the predetermined period has elapsed is a sufficient period for 10 game balls to win),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, if the display of the amount of prize awarded before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the light emitting means is caused to emit light only after the display of the amount of prize awarded after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed (for example, until the large prize opening is opened and the predetermined period has elapsed, i.e., until the number of prizes won is displayed, the performance effect lamp 9 is not caused to emit light as shown in Figs. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), and the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light only after the display of the number of prizes won after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed, as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22)).
This may be done.

This configuration discourages players from firing too quickly and encourages them to fire at the right time.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
When the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state, a suggestion effect can be executed to suggest that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and when the display of the award amount display starts after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round-in-play effect corresponding to the round game can be executed (for example, a round number display, an acquisition number display, and a jackpot-in-play effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the in-round performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the big win performance),
This may be done.

This configuration allows the performance to be instantly heightened when the mid-round performance is executed, increasing interest in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The game machine further includes a general winning means (such as a general winning port 10) through which the game medium can be won,
The display means includes:
The amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning at the general winning means can be displayed as the award amount display (for example, a winning number display can be displayed in response to a winning at the general winning port 10).
If the gaming medium does not win in the general winning means within the specified period, a specified display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if no gaming ball wins in the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded).
If a gaming medium wins in the general winning means within the specified period, a display corresponding to the winning in the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if a gaming ball wins in the general winning port 10 during a specified period after the large winning port is opened, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning port 10).
This may be done.

With this configuration, even if a player wins a general prize during a specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize is also displayed, preventing players from feeling anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area),
The display means is
A first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a big win) can be displayed at the same timing as the display of the amount of the award,
The first image is displayed with an effect at the same timing as the display of the amount of the award during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that activates a decorative pattern that constitutes a jackpot, etc.),
The effect display is displayed in a manner suggesting the predetermined area (for example, the effect display is such that a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot is moved toward the right rear, the front, and the left rear, suggesting a right hit, etc.)
This may be done.

With this configuration, the effect display suggests the play area to be launched, making it easier for the player to recognize the play area to be launched.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player, and that can be controlled to a normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state)) that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state, and that derives and displays a display result by variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns), and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the specific display is displayed without displaying the predetermined display (for example, "0015" is displayed instead of "0000");
moreover,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a portion in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and in the case of the temporary stop, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a specified period after the specified timing has passed (for example, as shown in Figure 14-44, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive pattern has become invisible on the image display device 5), and an example of such a gaming machine is one in which the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and in the case of the temporary stop, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a specified period after the specified timing has passed.

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game from being felt without causing anxiety to the player. Furthermore, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of elation at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In order to achieve the above objective, other gaming machines:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize;
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
A display of the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game medium winning the variable winning means can be displayed (for example, a display of the number of winnings, etc.).
When the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the number of winnings is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port is opened),
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display),
If the game medium wins on the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display),
moreover,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) that temporarily stops special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then resumes the variable display is a specific effect (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying a converging line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the converging line at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a part in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestion effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and in the case of the temporary stop, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a specified period after the specified timing has passed (for example, as shown in Figure 14-44, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are no longer displayed on the image display device 5), and an example of such a gaming machine is one in which the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestion effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and in the case of the temporary stop, the effect display can continue to be displayed for a specified period after the specified timing has passed.

With this configuration, if a win is made within a specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game from being felt without causing anxiety to the player. Furthermore, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of elation at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's disappointment at not making the temporary stop, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In other words, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (if no prize is won within the predetermined period) or a special display (if a prize is won within the predetermined period) is displayed as the prize amount display, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game, and even if the special identification information does not temporarily stop, the effect display continues to be displayed for a predetermined period of time after the predetermined timing has passed, so that the lingering effect display can leave a strong impression on the player of the suggestive presentation, and the player's sense of disappointment can be alleviated more easily than if the effect display were to end immediately after the predetermined timing has passed. In other words, a gaming machine can be provided that is likely to attract the interest of players and increase their interest in the presentation when installed in an amusement facility.

The specific effects may also be associated with the percentage at which the game is controlled to an advantageous state. For example, multiple types of specific effects may be provided, and the percentage at which the game is controlled to an advantageous state may vary depending on the specific effect that is executed. By doing so, it is possible to predict whether the game will be controlled to an advantageous state or not, and if so, how the amount of the bonus will be displayed, which increases interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a portion in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and in the case of no temporary stop, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a specified period of time after the specified timing has passed (for example, as shown in Figure 14-44, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive pattern has become invisible on the image display device 5), and an example of such a gaming machine is one in which the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and in the case of no temporary stop, the effect display can continue to be displayed for a specified period of time after the specified timing has passed.

moreover,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) that temporarily stops special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then resumes the variable display is a specific effect (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying a converging line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the converging line at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a part in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period of time after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the concentrated lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive symbols are no longer displayed on the image display device 5). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)
FIG. 11 shows an example of the display result judgment table. FIG. 11(A) shows an example of the display result judgment table for the first special pattern used when the variable special pattern is the first special pattern, and FIG. 11(B) shows an example of the display result judgment table for the second special pattern used when the variable special pattern is the second special pattern. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be used.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "jackpot" or "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 12, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Before returning to the processing of step S73, other processing may be executed.

Figure 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing this invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing this invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 193SG in the Embodiment of the Invention)
Next, a characteristic feature 193SG in this embodiment of the invention (hereinafter, abbreviated as "characteristic feature 193SG") will be described.

The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) to derive and display a display result, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) favorable to a player,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a portion in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) can be executed by temporarily stopping special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then restarting the variable display (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 13 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying a converging line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the converging line at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-34 and 14-35, a part in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the concentrated lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggested performance execution means moves the effect display toward a predetermined position where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) will temporarily stop if it does (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-48 as modified example 193SG-1, a portion where a converging line is moved toward the center of the image display device 5).
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
The effect display has a higher transparency after the specified timing than before the specified timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, in the case where the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines are displayed with a density of D2 before the timing of switching the display image data, and the convergence lines are displayed with a density of D1 after the timing of switching the display image data, so that the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the timing of switching the display image data than before the timing of switching the display image data).
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, the transparency of the effect display increases after the specified timing when the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops, thereby making the player aware that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) will not temporarily stop, and by drawing attention to the background image which is easily visible through the effect display, the player's disappointment that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
The suggestive effect execution means erases the effect display before any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the portion where the converging lines are hidden before the decorative pattern of the number other than "1", which is a winning combination, or "1", which is a losing combination, stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C).
5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for a temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
When the notification performance is executed, the temporarily stopped specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35(G) to FIG. 14-35(H), a crack appears in the pseudo consecutive pattern and the pattern explodes),
A movable body (e.g., a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to a performance position (e.g., a first performance position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) when the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped.
6. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body and the transformation of the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) can give an even stronger impression to the player that the ball has been temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
The movable body is
It is possible to perform a first action (e.g., movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 14-2 to the first performance position) and a second action (e.g., movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 14-2 to the second performance position) that has a smaller area of overlap with the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) than the first action,
In the notification performance, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35(F), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance).
7. The gaming machine according to claim 6,
According to this feature, it is possible to impress upon the player that the reel has been temporarily stopped, while preventing the movable object from making it difficult to see the specific performance identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of form 8 is
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a second movable body LED 193SG034) capable of emitting light,
In the first operation, the light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-2, during the temporary stop notification performance, the second movable body LED 193SG034 emits light in the color of the concentrated line displayed in the temporary stop suggestion performance).
8. The gaming machine according to claim 7,
According to this feature, the light-emitting portion emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 9 is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35(F) and FIG. 14-35(G), the part where the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first performance position to the retreat position before the pseudo consecutive pattern is not displayed on the image display device 5).
9. The gaming machine according to claim 7 or 8,
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is being erased.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
When the notification performance is executed, the temporarily stopped specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-35(G) to FIG. 14-35(H), a crack appears in the pseudo consecutive pattern and the pattern explodes),
A specific performance corresponding display means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of displaying a specific performance corresponding display (for example, a display of “×2”, “×3”, “×4”, etc.) suggesting that the N+1th variable display will be executed after the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
A movable body (e.g., a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to a performance position (e.g., a first performance position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific performance corresponding display displayed by the specific performance corresponding display means;
Equipped with
10. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 9,
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase attention to the specific performance-related display, improving the performance effect.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a second movable body LED 193SG034) capable of emitting light,
The light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect-corresponding display (for example, a part that causes the second movable body LED193SG034 to emit light in blue when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start count notification effect, in green when displaying "x3", and in red when displaying "x4").
11. The gaming machine according to claim 10,
According to this feature, since the light-emitting portion emits light in a manner corresponding to the separately variable display-compatible display, it is possible to draw attention to the specific performance-compatible display, thereby improving the performance effect.

A gaming machine of form 12 is
a special effect execution means (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a special effect (e.g., a portion in which a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5) in the case where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestion effect is executed;
Equipped with
When the suggestive performance is executed, the performance display of the suggestive performance is displayed in priority to the variable display of the performance identification information during the suggestive performance (for example, a portion in which a pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 instead of a normal decorative pattern),
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect relating to a transition between a first effect period up to the predetermined timing when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves to a predetermined position and temporarily stops (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, a period before the timing of switching display image data in the temporary stop suggestion effect) and a second effect period when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing and moves to a position past the predetermined position (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, a period after the timing of switching display image data in the temporary stop suggestion effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, FIG. 14-35, FIG. 14-44, a portion in the center of the image display device 5 that displays a convergence line while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image),
12. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 11,
This feature makes it easier to control the display in suggestive performances, and prevents the transition to the second performance period from becoming unnatural when the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped due to the special performance.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position is superimposed with the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a semi-transparent state at a position different from the predetermined position and corresponding to the second effect period (for example, a portion in the center of the image display device 5 that displays a temporary stop suggestion image),
13. The gaming machine according to claim 12,
This feature makes the transition to the second performance period even more natural.

A gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means is capable of synthesizing and displaying images drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-3 and 14-4, a portion capable of synthesizing and displaying data drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4 on the image display device 5);
The drawing layer on which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer on which the effect display of the suggestive effect is drawn (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-3, a portion in which a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo consecutive pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a convergent line is drawn as image data 4).
14. The gaming machine according to claim 12 or 13,
According to this feature, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) and the performance display of the special performance can be drawn separately from the performance display of the suggested performance, thereby increasing the freedom of the suggested performance, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information), and the special performance.

A gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect in which the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed, then moved and erased (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-35(G) to 14-35(H), 14-36(I) and 14-36(J), a portion in which a pseudo consecutive pattern is cracked and explodes, and then moved toward the player and then hidden).
The display means further includes a specific effect display means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of displaying a specific effect corresponding display (e.g., a display of “×2”, “×3”, “×4”, etc.) suggesting that the N+1th variable display will be executed after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased,
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-37, a portion that moves and displays displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4" and the like toward the player and then makes them invisible);
The effect identification information in the N+1th variable display is visible during the period from when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased until when the specific effect corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-37(O) , when “x2”, “x3”, “x4”, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative patterns on the left and right are visible to the player).
15. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 14,
According to this feature, the presentation effect of the notification presentation and the specific presentation corresponding display can be enhanced, and since the presentation identification information can be seen before the specific presentation corresponding display is erased, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display will resume.

A gaming machine of form 16 is
A notice performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notice performance that notifies the player of the high possibility of the advantageous state by using the performance identification information,
The advance notice performance execution means restricts the execution of the advance notice performance when the specific performance corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-3, in the case where the display of "x2", "x3", "x4" is moved (enlarged) toward the player as the first variable display start count notification performance, the portion restricting the advance notice performance execution).
16. The gaming machine according to claim 15,
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution of the advance notice makes it difficult to recognize that the variable display will resume.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
The movement of both the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific effect corresponding display is toward the player who is playing the game (for example, a portion where a pseudo consecutive pattern explodes and moves toward the player, and a portion where displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. move toward the player).
17. The gaming machine according to claim 15 or 16,
This feature can enhance the impression given to the player and improve the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
A special effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) is provided that can execute a special effect (for example, a portion that displays a visibility-impairing image such as an image of an explosion as shown in modified example 193SG-4) that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has been temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed,
The specific performance execution means makes it possible to view a display corresponding to the resumption of variable display after the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to view by the special performance (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-4, a part that executes variable display again after making the visibility-impairing image non-display),
18. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
According to this feature, before a display including performance identification information corresponding to the resumption of variable display is started, a special performance is executed in which the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is difficult to see, making it easy to understand that the variable display will be resumed.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
An image display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a variable display of the performance identification information and a performance display of each performance;
A light guide plate (e.g., the light guide plate shown in modified example 193SG-4) that is a transparent plate material that is provided on the player side of the image display means and allows the player to see the display of the image display means and that can display the special image by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface;
Equipped with
The special effect execution means makes the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means difficult to see by displaying the special image on the light guide plate during the special effect (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a visibility-impairing image is displayed on the light guide plate, making the pseudo consecutive patterns displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see for the player).
20. The gaming machine according to claim 18,
According to this feature, a special image is displayed on the light guide plate, which can enhance the impression on the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
In the case where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data is V1, but the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of switching the display image data is V3).
20. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 19,
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether it is before or after the specified timing at which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) to the temporary stop position before the specified timing is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the specified position after the specified timing when it returns to the specified position (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo-consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo-consecutive pattern may temporarily stop after starting to move downward on the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive pattern before the display image data switching timing is different from the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive pattern when it returns to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5).
21. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
This feature makes it easier for the player to understand whether the movement is before passing a predetermined position, or a return movement after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
The suggestion effect execution means, when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, restricts the display of the effect display (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-5, when the pseudo consecutive pattern returns to the center of the image display device 5 after once passing through the center of the image display device 5, does not display the convergence lines again).
22. The gaming machine according to claim 21 .
This feature makes it even easier to understand that the movement is a return movement after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-34, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is V1, but the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is V2).
20. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 19,
This feature makes it easier for the player to understand whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The direction of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the direction of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, as shown in Figures 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop move from above to below, but the pseudo consecutive symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player (nearby side)).
24. The gaming machine according to claim 23,
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement has occurred after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent the misconception of movement.

Figure 14-1 is a configuration diagram showing the control board etc. in this characteristic part 193SG. As shown in Figure 14-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 has a drive motor (not shown), and is operable by the performance control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. In addition, a second movable body LED 193SG034 for illuminating the second movable body 193SG033 is built into the second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 14-2(A), when not in operation, the second movable body 193SG033 is located between the image display device 5 and the game board 2, in a position below the image display device 5 (retracted position). Note that in the retracted position, the second movable body 193SG033 is mostly hidden by the game board 2, making it difficult for the player to see.

The second movable body 193SG033 in this characteristic part 193SG moves upward from the retreat position shown in FIG. 14-2(A) during the variable display to notify of a temporary stop during the variable display and the first variable display start count notification effect described below, and to notify of a jackpot during the reach effect of the super reach.

When the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect are executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves (operates) from the retracted position to the first performance position which is in front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), whereas when the jackpot notification in the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the second movable body 193SG003 moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second performance position which is in front of the image display device 5 and is higher than the first performance position, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C).

Although not specifically shown, the second movable body 193SG033, which has been moved to the first or second performance position, is configured to return from the first or second performance position to the retreat position again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance, so that a portion of the second movable body 193SG overlaps with the pseudo consecutive symbols when viewed from the front (see FIG. 14-35 (F)). On the other hand, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second performance position only when a jackpot notification is executed during the super reach performance. In other words, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first performance position is an operation that overlaps with a larger area of the pseudo consecutive symbols than the movement from the retracted position to the second performance position.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 14-3(A) to 14-3(D) and Figs. 14-4(A) to 14-4(D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 14-3 shows image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance (see Fig. 14-35) in this characteristic section 193SG, and Fig. 14-4 shows image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 14-3 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display a temporary stop suggestion image suggesting that the pseudo consecutive pattern (the pattern displayed as "NEXT" in this feature section) will stop (temporarily stop) in the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being performed.

The pseudo consecutive symbols in this feature section 193SG are special symbols that are displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the decorative symbols only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect described below, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped to execute the re-variable display of the decorative symbols (pseudo consecutive effect). However, the invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive symbols may be symbols that are different from the decorative symbols and that are displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect described below.

Furthermore, in this feature section 193SG, an example has been given of a form in which the pseudo consecutive pattern is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of a decorative pattern only during a temporary stop suggestion effect or a temporary stop notification effect, but this invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern that is displayed as part of a variable display during the period of a temporary stop suggestion effect or a temporary stop notification effect along with a normal decorative pattern.

Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols are different from the decorative symbols, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by temporarily stopping the normal decorative symbols (the symbols of the numbers "1" to "9" in this characteristic part) in the center of the image display device 5, and then changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbols into the pseudo consecutive symbols.

As shown in Figures 14-3 (B) and 14-4 (A), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display the aforementioned pseudo consecutive patterns moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being performed, and is also data that is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 193SG) moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo consecutive patterns immediately after the temporary stop suggestion performance ends without the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

The image data 2 also displays a swaying display of decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when a temporary stop suggestion effect is being performed, and also displays a variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R when a temporary stop suggestion effect is not being performed.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(B), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figures 14-3 (C) and 14-4 (C), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C).

As shown in Figs. 14-3 and 14-4, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

Although not shown, the image data in this characteristic section 193SG includes image data 1 to image data 4 as well as image data 5 that is drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5. The display priority of this image data 5 is set lower than that of image data 4. In other words, in this characteristic section 193SG, of the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer of data.

When the temporary stop suggestion effect is being performed, as shown in FIG. 14-3(D), the image based on image data 2 (a pseudo-repeated pattern moving from the top to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 4 (concentrated lines), and the image based on image data 1 (a temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 14-4(D), the image based on image data 3 (a pseudo-repeated pattern moving from the center to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 4 (concentrated lines), and the image based on image data 2 (a decorative pattern moving from the top to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 3 and the image based on image data 4.

The convergent lines in this feature section 193SG are set to a high transmittance (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in Figures 14-3(C) and 14-4(D), while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, the player can see the decorative patterns, pseudo consecutive patterns, and temporary stop suggestion images through the convergent lines.

In particular, in this characteristic section 193SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 14-3 on the image display device 5 to draw the player's attention to whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Also, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 14-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop (FIG. 14-3) to image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns will not temporarily stop (FIG. 14-4) shown in FIG. 14-4.

Figure 14-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 193SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-5 (A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 14-5 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-5(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability), and whether it will be a small win, as the judgment result at the time of winning. Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the variation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 14-5(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-6, in this feature section 193SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 193SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 193SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 193SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 193SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 193SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 14-7(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 193SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature section 193SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 14-8 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 193SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 193SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 14-8 (B). In this feature section 193SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game of "Probable jackpot C", a round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature section 193SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-9), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 193SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-9 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 193SG has two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns, the invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, or there may be only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern. Also, even for the super reach fluctuation pattern, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature section 193SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in FIG. 14-9, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature section 193SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special chart variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In other words, for the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects that are executed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic section 193SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but this invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of the fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 14-10 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-10, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for a normal reach pseudo-consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 2 jackpots), or PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 3 jackpots). Also, if the variable display result is a sure-win A or sure-win B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 2 jackpots), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 jackpots).

As shown in FIG. 14-10, the determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4 are different between jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a ratio of 30%, PB1-2 at a ratio of 45%, PB1-3 at a ratio of 20%, and PB1-4 at a ratio of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a ratio of 5%, PB1-2 at a ratio of 20%, PB1-3 at a ratio of 30%, and PB1-4 at a ratio of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot A or a sure-variable jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to be a Super Reach variable pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of times that the pseudo consecutive performances are executed, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot A or a sure-variable jackpot B, more pseudo consecutive performances are likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. For this reason, in this feature section 193SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable pattern in the variable display and the number of times that the pseudo consecutive performances are executed.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, a special win variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win variation pattern) using the special win variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, so it is difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance two misses), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach pseudo consecutive performance three misses).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss) and PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 193SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, or on the time-saving state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 193SG190 as shown in Figure 14-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 193SG190 shown in Figure 14-11 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 193SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 193SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 193SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 193SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 193SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 193SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 193SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this characteristic part 193SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a display pending flag indicating whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Figure 11) is pending, that is, a display pending flag indicating that the display pattern is pending because a start opening winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a pending memory count notification command have been newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start winning, and a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart pending memory and the second special chart pending memory.

In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this feature unit 193SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a performance restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory. Note that the performance restriction flag is a flag that indicates that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading preview performance when a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port in the command analysis process (Figure 14-18) but the pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are not received within the first reserved memory number notification waiting time or the second reserved memory number notification waiting time described below.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)), and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 193SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 193SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 14-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 14-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIG. 14-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the on state (step 193SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting part. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 193SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 193SGS104; Y), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS105 (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 193SGS103 or step 193SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (step 193SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 193SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 193SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 193SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and the processing proceeds to step 193SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and the start winning processing is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 14-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 193SGS112 of Figure 14-13 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 193SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S110 of Figure 5, Figure 14-14) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S111 of Figure 5, Figure 14-15) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 193SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 14-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 193SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 14-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 193SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 193SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 193SGS109 in FIG. 14-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 193SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 193SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 193SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 193SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 193SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 193SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. Of these, of miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, for example, 498 determination values from 0 to 497 (approximately 50%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 598 determination values from 0 to 597 (approximately 60%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values from 0 to 697 (approximately 70%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 determination values (approximately 10%) from 898 to 997 are assigned to the range of possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 193SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 14-13 (A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS135), and proceeds to step 193SGS138.

In addition, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a variable jackpot A or a variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is a sure jackpot A or a sure jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS136), and proceed to step 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not a variable jackpot A or a variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; N), in other words, if the determined jackpot type is a variable jackpot C, select and set the special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (step 193SGS137) and proceed to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern determination tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for variable pattern determination (step 193SGS138). In this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in FIG. 14-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 193SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS132), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 14-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 14-14, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" (step 193SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 193SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 193SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 193SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 193SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of step 193SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry (step 193SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 193SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set as the table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 193SGS150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 193SGS150a, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting section (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-8 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 193SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that the result is not a "big win" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-7 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special chart display result of "small win" to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c). In step 193SGS150c, if the variable special chart is the first special chart, the determination value corresponding to the first special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win", and if the variable special chart is the second special chart, the determination value corresponding to the second special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win".

If it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section is set to the ON state (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; N), proceed to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, a fixed special symbol is set in response to the pre-determined result of whether to control to a big win game state (whether the big win flag is on or not), whether to control to a small win game state (whether the small win flag is on or not), and further, the determined result of the big win type in the case of a big win game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "big win" in step 193SGS150a, if the big win type in step 193SGS154 is "big win A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the big win type is "big win B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C", a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small jackpot", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small jackpot symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 193SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 14-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 14-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is identified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "Probable variable jackpot C", that is, if it is either "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", or "Non-probable variable jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A or jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the identified jackpot type. Specifically, if the identified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot A" or "Probable variable jackpot B", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, if the identified jackpot type is a "C-type jackpot" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

If the determination in step 193SGS161 indicates that the big win flag is not ON (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small win flag is ON (step 193SGS166). If the small win flag is ON (step 193SGS166; Y), a special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game control flag setting unit determines whether the time-saving flag is on to determine whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 193SGS168). If the time-saving flag is on (step 193SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used to determine the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types (step 193SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 193SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example, by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 193SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 193SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 193SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining the variable pattern as one of multiple types (step 193SGS174), and proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 193SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the process of step 193SGS175 determines the variation pattern, thereby determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, the process of step 193SGS170 includes a process for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a reach state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 193SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 193SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (step 193SGS177). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), being displayed stationary. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 193SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 14-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and performs control to stop and display the stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step 193SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and if the big win flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), it is further determined whether the small win flag is turned on (step 193SGS183).

If the small win flag is in the ON state, the performance control board 12 is set to send a win start 5 designation command corresponding to a small win (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small win display time is set in the small win display time timer (step 193SGS190b). Also, the large prize opening count counter is set to the number of times it has been opened (for example, 2 times) (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 193SGS190d), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 193SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or the time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and the time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 193SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 193SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) (step 193SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving count counter value is "0". If the time-saving count counter value is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 193SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 193SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 193SGS195), and then proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 14-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 193SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193 SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 193 SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is a special jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), the special jackpot flag is set to ON (step 193SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not a guaranteed jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot A or a guaranteed jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the guaranteed jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS208), the time-saving count counter is set to "0" (step 193SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), steps 193SGS211 and 193SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 193SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 193SGS215), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special symbols (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 14-18, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted through the relay board 15 by checking the memory contents of the performance control command receiving buffer (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it determines whether the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time set (set) in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 described later has elapsed (step 193SGS237), and if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, if the first or second pending memory number notification command has not been received before the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 193 SGS237; Y), the display pending flag of the entry for which the first or second pending memory number notification command has not yet been stored is turned on, and the performance restriction flag of the entry for which storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193 SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222). Then, if it is a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the processing of step 193SGS223, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the first pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the performance control timer setting unit 193SG192.

If the received command in step 193SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224). If it is a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), the second pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the processing of step 193SGS225, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command in step 193SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command in step 193SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command in step 193SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, if it is a first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared (step 193SGS229), for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer.

If the received command in step 193SGS228 is not the first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230). If the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231).

After executing either step 193SGS229 or step 193SGS231, the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to ON, and if there is an unreceived command, the performance restriction flag is set to ON (step 193SGS232).

If the received command in step 193SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), if the received command in step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or after executing any of the processes in steps 193SGS223, 193SGS225, and 193SGS232, the received command is stored at the top of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 193SG194A shown in Figure 14-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to step 193SGS221.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A.

If the received command in step 193SGS230 is not the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, if the first or second pending memory number notification command has not been received before the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 193SGS235; Y), the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to ON, and the performance restriction flag of the corresponding entry that has not yet been stored is set to ON (step 193SGS236), and processing returns to step 193SGS221.

Figure 14-19 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is to be provided in the pre-reading preview setting process, as well as the performance pattern of the pre-reading preview performance (display pattern of the pending memory display) (S161), and then executes a pending display update process to update the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the memory contents of the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS162).

Figure 14-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 5 as the advance preview setting process. In the advance preview setting process shown in Figure 14-20, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not variable display is being executed can be determined by whether or not the value of the performance control process flag is one of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241. If the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the process further determines whether or not the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed (step 193SGS240b). Note that the first variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has been started during one variable display after the re-variable display has been started as a pseudo consecutive effect, as shown in Figures 14-29 (E), 14-30 (L), and 14-31 (S). Also, in step 193SGS240a, whether or not the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed can be determined by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If the first variable display start count notification effect is not being executed (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241. If the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed (step 193SGS240b; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS250, where the pending display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, the pre-reading preview effect is not executed while the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed.

In step 193SGS241, the performance control CPU 120 checks the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. Then, it determines whether there is a new command stored at the start winning by checking whether there is an entry with the display pending flag in the on state (set to "1") (step 193SGS242).

If there is no entry with the display pending flag on (step 193SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the display pending flag on (step 193SGS242; Y), it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a sure-variant big win C or a small win (step 193SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a sure-variant big win C or a small win (step 193SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS250, where the reserved display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, the pre-reading notice performance is not executed for reserved memories that are sure-variant big win C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a sure jackpot C or a small jackpot, it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (sure jackpot A, sure jackpot B, or non-sure jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the type of jackpot is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 193SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit, and the type of jackpot identified in step 193SGS244, a look-ahead preview performance judgment table at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the display pattern when the look-ahead preview performance is executed (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21(A) is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21(A), the determination ratio for whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type) is varied depending on the type of jackpot identified in the processing of step 193SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white rectangle (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than a sure-win jackpot C, the pre-reading preview performance will never be determined to be non-executed, and the pre-reading preview performance will always be determined to be executed, and either display pattern α or display pattern β will be determined as the display pattern (pre-notice type).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-21(A), when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot A," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot B" or "Non-probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and display pattern β is executed as the display pattern (notice type), the probability that the jackpot type will be a special jackpot A is higher than when display pattern α is executed, and the player's anticipation of a special jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is always decided, and either display pattern α, which displays the reserved memory display in a white square (◇), or display pattern β, which displays the reserved memory display in a white star (☆), is executed; however, this invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, there may be a case where it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, just as when the variable display result is a "miss."

In addition, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of an entry whose display pending flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry whose display pending flag is on is identified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 193SGS247, a pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, the display pattern (preview type) and whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance are determined using a determination ratio such as that shown in FIG. 14-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 193SGS247.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types): display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a specific form of a white square (◇), and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a specific form of a white star (☆). In addition, when the pre-reading notice performance is determined to be non-executed, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a normal form of a circle (○).

As shown in FIG. 14-21 (B), when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable category is "other", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable pattern category is "other", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach", and if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss," the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined not to be executed is set to the highest, regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach," "other," or "super reach," and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-21(A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the pre-reading preview performance is not determined to be non-executed (no preview performance), and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern α or display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α or display pattern β is determined in any of the categories of variable patterns when the variable display result is a "miss."

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "Miss (non-reach)", "Miss (super reach)", or "Miss (other)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern α is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Big hit (probable hit A)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" than when display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed); in particular, when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "high probability jackpot A," which can increase the player's sense of anticipation.

After executing step 193SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 193SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, that is, whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 193SGS249).

After step 193SGS245 is executed or if it is decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern α showing the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern β showing the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

Also, in step 193SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 193SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white "circle" (step 193SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 changes the value of the display pending flag for the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Also, when the variable display is executed and the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U, which are located at the lower position of the image display device 5, is updated according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A after the shift.

Specifically, if the number of first special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of first special reserved memories is two, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of second special reserved memories is two, for example, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory, for example, the reserved memory display of one is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the reserved memory display of one is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

And each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and the reserved memory display also shifts in a predetermined shift direction (towards the center of the screen in this feature part 193SG).

In other words, when the reserved memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described below, which is executed when the variable display starts, and the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed based on the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A after the shift, and if there is a new reserved memory due to the start winning, the display pattern of that reserved memory is determined and set in the reserved display flag, and it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a display mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag.

Note that, in this characteristic section 193SG, an example is shown in which the processing of step 193SGS252 is executed in the advance notice setting process, but the invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the hold displays in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process different from the advance notice setting process (for example, a hold display update process).

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, a decision is made in step 193SGS242 as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory at the time of the start winning, on the condition that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning. However, if a start winning in the first start winning port and a start winning in the second start winning port occur simultaneously, and it is determined in step 193SGS242 that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning in both the first special chart and the second special chart, in other words, if an entry with the display pending flag in the on state exists in both the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory, then both entries are subject to the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance. If the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special chart is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special chart is newly stored are both targets for deciding whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed simultaneously in both the pending display of the pending memory of the first special chart and the pending display of the second special chart.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as described above, when a start winning entry into the first start winning port and a start winning entry into the second start winning port occur simultaneously, both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the first special chart is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the second special chart is newly stored are subject to the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and in such a case, it may be decided to execute or not execute only one of the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart and the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart.

Figure 14-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 13. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 193SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stop patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stop patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the stop patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a reach miss combination (miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether or not the corresponding variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo consecutive performance during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the corresponding variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo consecutive performance during variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), a preview performance decision process for variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed) is executed to determine whether or not a preview performance is executed during variable display and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the change pattern is a super reach change pattern or not. If the change pattern is a super reach change pattern (193SGS279; Y), it decides whether to execute a special temporary stop notification performance instead of a temporary stop notification performance based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). The temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and the special temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and updating the background image displayed on image display device 5 to a background image according to the number of temporary stops (a first special background image if the temporary stop is the first time, a second special background image if the temporary stop is the second time, and a third special background image if the temporary stop is the third time).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281). If it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281; Y), it selects a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification performance and the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

If the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or if it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds based on the variable display result (step 193SGS283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

In addition, if the relevant variable pattern is one in which pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display (step 193SGS277; N), a preview performance decision process for variable display that does not execute pseudo consecutive performance is executed to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance during the variable display and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute a preview performance and the preview performance to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variable pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in either 193SGS282, 193SGS284, or 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 193SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 193SGS289). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, it controls the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, it switches to the next process data, starts the next process timer anew, and controls the performance device according to the next process data, thereby executing the variable display of the decorative pattern. Note that if the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute a preview performance in the variable display start setting process, it is capable of executing a preview performance execution process to execute a preview performance within the variable display performance process.

Next, the flow of the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 14-23 (A), when the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive performance once during the variable display, a temporary stop suggestion performance is executed first, which suggests a temporary stop of the decorative symbols after the reach is reached. Note that the temporary stop suggestion performance in this characteristic part 193SG is a performance in which the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols are variably displayed at a slower speed than normal in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Note that the length of the temporary stop suggestion performance period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification performance period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

If the temporary stop notification performance period is set to the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing A occurs, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop notification performance is performed for 2 seconds. Also, if the temporary stop notification performance period is set to the temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing B occurs, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop notification performance is performed for 1.5 seconds. Note that, as shown in FIG. 14-23(A), the temporary stop notification performance period A and the temporary stop notification performance period B are set to end at the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification performance is set to end at a specific timing regardless of whether the performance period is set to 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect ends, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. The re-variable display notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a re-variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed by outputting a re-variable display notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, and displaying an image of a character according to the number of re-variable display times on the image display device 5 (an image of character A if the re-variable display time is the first time, an image of character B if the re-variable display time is the second time, and an image of character C if the re-variable display time is the third time).

The first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification performance. When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the first re-variable display start count notification performance is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification performance. The first re-variable display start count notification performance is a performance in which the image display device 5 displays the re-variable display count of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display count, and an effect image of a color according to the re-variable display count is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In other words, the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the first re-variable display is a performance in which "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a blue effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5, the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the second re-variable display is a performance in which "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a green effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5, and the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the third re-variable display is a performance in which "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a red effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5.

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start count notification effect. The second variable display start count notification effect is an effect in which the variable display count of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect.

After the second variable display start count notification effect ends, the game will enter a reach state again and a temporary stop suggestion effect will be executed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols will not temporarily stop and a normal reach reach effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 14-23(B), when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect will not be executed and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during a variable display, in the same way as when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 14-23(A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during a variable display, after a reach is reached, a temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop and re-variable display of the first pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, a second variable display start count notification effect, and a first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed, and then a reach is reached again and a second temporary stop and re-variable display of the pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed. Then, after the second second variable display start count notification effect is finished, a reach is reached again and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the Super Reach reach effect is executed.

If the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), and if the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds).

As described above, in the second re-variable display notification performance, an image of a character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the second first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, unlike the first first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 (the second second variable display start count notification performance displays "x3" of a smaller size than that of the second first variable display start count notification performance).

As shown in FIG. 14-25, when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect will not be executed and the change pattern is a super reach change pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed three times during the variable display, the change pattern shown in FIG. 14-23 (B) is the same as when the change pattern is a super reach change pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed twice during the variable display, after the reach is reached, a temporary stop suggestion effect, temporary stop and re-variable display of the pseudo consecutive symbols up to the second time, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed. Then, after the second second variable display start count notification effect is finished, the reach is reached again, and the third temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and further a reach effect of the super reach is executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), and if the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds).

As described above, in the third re-variable display notification performance, an image of a character (character C) different from that in the first and second re-variable display performances is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the third first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, different from the second first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance (the third second variable display start count notification performance displays "x4" of a smaller size than that in the third first variable display start count notification performance).

As shown in FIG. 14-26, if it has been decided to execute a special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during the variable display, a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed first.

In addition, in this variable display, when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop notification effect ends, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for two seconds. In other words, in a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop hint effect period and the special temporary stop notification effect period are constant.

After the special temporary stop notification effect is finished, the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern is executed without executing the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. After a while, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed. In other words, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is not displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, and the image display device 5 does not display "x2" as the first variable display start count notification effect, but only the image display device 5 displays "x2" smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect as the second variable display start count notification effect.

Then, after the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and then the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

In addition, as the second second variable display start count notification effect, a "x3" smaller in size than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5, as in FIG. 14-23 (B).

As shown in Figure 14-27, when it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed three times during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the notification effect of the number of times the second variable display has started are executed as in Figure 14-26, and then the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols for the third time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the notification effect of the number of times the second variable display has started are executed, and then the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

As for the third second variable display start count notification effect, the image display device 5 displays "x4" in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect, as in FIG. 14-23 (B).

As mentioned above in part, as shown in FIG. 14-28, the temporary stop notification effect in this feature section 193SG is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and is an effect that is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the moment the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image according to the number of temporary stops (the first special background image if the temporary stop is the first, the second special background image if the second, and the third special background image if the third). Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the next special background image is updated or the variable display ends, while the output period of the temporary stop notification sound (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, the same as part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a re-variable display of a decorative pattern is being executed by outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and displaying an image of a character according to the number of times of re-variable display on the image display device 5 (an image of character A if the number of times of re-variable display is the first, an image of character B if the number of times of re-variable display is the second, and an image of character C if the number of times of re-variable display is the third). The performance period of the re-variable display notification effect (the display period of the image of the character on the image display device 5 and the output period of the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 seconds regardless of the number of times of execution of the re-variable display. As mentioned above, in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance, the higher the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is executed (the number of times the temporary stop and re-variable display are executed), the higher the expectation of a big win is set for the re-variable display notification effect, so that the expectation of a big win is set to be highest when the image of character C is finally displayed, and the lowest when the image of character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including the re-variable display has started during one variable display after the re-variable display has started as a pseudo consecutive effect, and is an effect that displays the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has started on the image display device 5 ("x2" for the first first variable display start count notification effect, "x3" for the second first variable display start count notification effect, and "x4" for the third first variable display start count notification effect). The duration of these first variable display start count notification effects is 1 second regardless of the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including the re-variable display has started.

The second variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started during one variable display after the first variable display start count notification effect, and is an effect that displays the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started on the image display device 5 ("x2" for the first first variable display start count notification effect, "x3" for the second first variable display start count notification effect, and "x4" for the third first variable display start count notification effect) in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect. The duration of these second variable display start count notification effects is 2 seconds regardless of the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started.

Figure 14-29 (A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed) of the variable display start setting process in Figure 14-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed), the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random number value for preview performance execution determination is extracted, and using the random number value and a preview performance determination table (not shown), it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance, and which preview performance to execute (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, a decision is made to not execute the preview performance at a rate of 5%, to execute the cut-in preview performance at a rate of 20%, to execute the group preview performance at a rate of 45%, and to execute both the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance at a rate of 30%.

Note that a cut-in preview performance is a performance in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-29 (F), and a swarm preview performance is a performance in which a large number of characters are displayed crossing the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14-29 (G).

If the variable display result is a miss and a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach miss), the preview performance is not executed at a rate of 40%, the cut-in preview performance is executed at a rate of 30%, the group preview performance is executed at a rate of 25%, and the cut-in preview performance and group preview performance are executed at a rate of 5%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and a normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach miss), the preview performance is not executed at a rate of 90%, the cut-in preview performance is executed at a rate of 8%, the group preview performance is executed at a rate of 2%, and the cut-in preview performance and group preview performance are executed at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance in this characteristic part 193SG, the lowest jackpot expectation is set when neither the cut-in notice performance nor the group notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the cut-in notice performance is executed as the notice performance than when neither the cut-in notice performance nor the group notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the group notice performance is executed as the notice performance than when only the cut-in notice performance is executed, and the highest jackpot expectation is set when both the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance are executed as notice performances (jackpot expectation for notice performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance: cut-in notice performance + group notice performance > group notice performance > cut-in performance > not executed).

After executing step 193SGS302, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a preview performance (deciding to execute at least one of a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance) (step 193SGS303). If it has not decided to execute any preview performance (step 193SGS303; N), it ends the preview performance decision process (for executing pseudo consecutive performances); if it has decided to execute any preview performance (step 193SGS303; Y), it stores the decided preview performance and sets a preview performance start waiting timer to end the preview performance decision process (for executing pseudo consecutive performances) (steps 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 14-32, the execution period of these preview effects overlaps with the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start count notification effect period. In particular, if it has been decided that both the cut-in preview effect and the group preview effect will be executed as preview effects, the cut-in preview effect and the group preview effect will be executed in an overlapping manner during the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start count notification effect period.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if it is decided in the preview performance decision process (for when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed) that any preview performance will be executed, the same preview performance will be executed during all re-variable display notification performance periods (see Figures 14-29 to 14-31).

Figure 14-30 (A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed) of the variable display start setting process in Figure 14-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed), the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random number value for preview performance execution determination is extracted, and using the random number value and a preview performance determination table (not shown), it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display where pseudo consecutive performance is not executed, and which preview performance to execute (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-30 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, a decision is made to not execute the preview effect 5% of the time, to execute the cut-in preview effect 30% of the time, and to execute the group preview effect 65% of the time.

If the variable display result is a miss and a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach miss), the preview performance is not executed with a probability of 40%, the cut-in preview performance is executed with a probability of 35%, and the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 25%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and a normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach miss), the preview performance is not executed with a probability of 90%, the cut-in preview performance is executed with a probability of 8%, and the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed in this characteristic part 193SG, the lowest jackpot expectation is set when neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the cut-in preview performance is executed as the preview performance than when neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is executed, and the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the group preview performance is executed as the preview performance than when only the cut-in preview performance is executed (jackpot expectation for preview performance in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance: group preview performance > cut-in performance > not executed).

After executing step 193SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313). If it has not been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313; N), the preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not executed) is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313; Y), the decided preview performance is stored, a preview performance start waiting timer is set, and the preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not executed) is terminated (steps 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

When a preview performance is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed, the preview performance may be executed at any time during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

Figure 14-31 (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio when the presentation control CPU 120 decides whether or not to execute a special temporary stop notification presentation in step 193SG280 in Figure 14-22. In step 193SG280 in Figure 14-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot (super reach jackpot), the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the special temporary stop notification presentation (execution of the temporary stop notification presentation) at a rate of 20% and decides to execute the special temporary stop notification presentation (not to execute the temporary stop notification presentation) at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss (super reach miss), the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the special temporary stop notification presentation (execution of the temporary stop notification presentation) at a rate of 80% and decides to execute the special temporary stop notification presentation (not to execute the temporary stop notification presentation) at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when a special temporary stop notification effect is executed in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (when a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern and a special background image is displayed on image display device 5), the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when a special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when only a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; when a temporary stop notification effect is executed) (expectation of a jackpot in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance: execution of special temporary stop notification effect > non-execution of special temporary stop notification effect).

Also, as mentioned above, when focusing on the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, if the pseudo consecutive effect is executed once during the variable display, only the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, but if the pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during the variable display, after the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the first special background image is updated to the second special background image), and the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the second special background image is updated to the third special background image).

In other words, for variable displays that perform pseudo consecutive performances, the more pseudo consecutive performances that are performed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a jackpot is set, so that the highest chance of a jackpot is set when the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the third special background image, and the lowest chance of a jackpot is set when the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image (jackpot chance for special background images that are finally displayed on the image display device 5 in variable displays that perform pseudo consecutive performances: third special background image > second special background image > first special background image).

Figure 14-31 (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines the tentative stop notification presentation period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in Figure 14-22. In step 193SG283 in Figure 14-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines the tentative stop notification presentation period to be tentative stop notification presentation period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and to be tentative stop notification presentation period B (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the performance control CPU 120 determines the tentative stop notification presentation period to be tentative stop notification presentation period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40% and to be tentative stop notification presentation period B (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 60%. In other words, when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance, if the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 1.5 seconds (expectation of a jackpot for the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance: temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) > temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds)).

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is given of a form in which the temporary stop notification display period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but this invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification display period may be uniquely determined to be one period, or may be determined from three or more periods.

In addition, this feature section 193SG exemplifies a form in which a longer temporary stop notification display period has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a shorter temporary stop notification display period, but the invention is not limited to this, and a shorter temporary stop notification display period may have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a longer temporary stop notification display period.

Next, the output mode of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R during the variable display will be described. As shown in FIG. 14-32, first, the speakers 8L, 8R are capable of outputting background music (BGM) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except during the re-variable display notification performance period. In addition, the speakers 8L, 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start count notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion performance period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification performance period, the re-variable display notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period, and the first variable display start count notification sound is output only during the first variable display start count notification performance period.

Furthermore, speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in preview performance sound and a group preview performance sound. Of these, the cut-in preview performance sound is output only during the cut-in preview performance execution period when it has been decided that a cut-in preview performance will be executed, and the group preview performance sound is output only during the group preview performance execution period when it has been decided that a group preview performance will be executed.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 14-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L, 8R is restricted during the variable display notification performance period in which the variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, while the output of BGM from the speakers 8L, 8R is not restricted during the variable display except for the variable display notification performance period. Furthermore, during the tentative stop suggestion performance period, two types of sounds, BGM and the tentative stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, while during the first variable display start count notification performance period, up to four types of sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, including the first variable display start count notification sound as well as BGM, a cut-in advance performance sound, and a group advance performance sound.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the tentative stop suggestion performance period will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 14-33, during the tentative stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 displays the moving pseudo consecutive symbols from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing them with image data 2. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the tentative stop suggestion performance period to the display image data switching timing. Note that the pseudo consecutive symbols are not drawn as image data 2 from the display image data switching timing onwards; in other words, the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden as image data 2 from the display image data switching timing onwards.

In addition, halfway through the pseudo consecutive pattern moving at speed V1, a tentative stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with image data 1. The tentative stop suggestion image is displayed from halfway through the pseudo consecutive pattern moving at speed V1 until the display image data switching timing period, but is not displayed (hidden) during other periods.

Also, just before the timing of switching the display image data, the pseudo-repeated pattern begins to be displayed in the center of the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3. The pseudo-repeated pattern drawn by the image data 3 does not move (speed 0) until the timing of switching the display image data, but from the timing of switching the display image data, it moves downward from the center of the image display device 5 at a speed V3 that is faster than the aforementioned speed V1. The pseudo-repeated pattern moved at speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 becomes invisible as the pseudo-repeated pattern moves outside the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, from the timing of switching the display image data, the decorative symbols are moved (variable display) from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is performed from the timing of switching the display image data at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) that is faster than speed V1 and slower than speed V3. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbols continues until the start of the reach performance.

Then, from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, the image display device 5 displays the converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The converging lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, and then at D2, which is denser than D1. In other words, the number of converging lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, from the timing when the display image data is switched, the converging lines are displayed again at a density of D1, and then are hidden.

Therefore, during the period of the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo consecutive patterns are not stopped, from the start of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the time when the display image data is switched, the converging lines are displayed at a density of D1, making the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) lower than the state before the temporary stop suggestion performance was performed (visibility: high) (visibility: medium). Furthermore, the density of the converging lines changes from D1 to D2, making the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) even lower (visibility: low).

In addition, from the time when the display image data is switched to the time when the display of the converging lines ends, the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is higher (visibility: medium) than when the converging lines are displayed at density D2 because the converging lines are displayed at density D1. Then, after the time when the display of the converging lines ends, the display of the converging lines ends (they are not displayed), so the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is the highest (visibility: high).

As shown in FIG. 14-34, during the tentative stop indication period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 executes the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the tentative stop indication period to the end timing of the tentative stop indication period (the tentative stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the tentative stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols is the same as the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 14-33. Furthermore, after the tentative stop indication is executed, the tentative stop notification effect is executed, but during the tentative stop notification effect execution period, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped (at a speed V0) in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C and then hidden.

In addition, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of converging lines is executed on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 4. The display of the converging lines is such that the density (display density) of the converging lines is displayed in D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive patterns), but is hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, the image display device 5 displays the converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The converging lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, and then are displayed at D2, which is denser than D1. In other words, the number of converging lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. The converging lines are then hidden from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped.

Therefore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive patterns are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the timing of the display image data change, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower (visibility: medium) than the state before the temporary stop suggestion performance was executed (visibility: high) because the concentration lines are displayed at density D1. Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is further lower (visibility: low) because the density of the concentration lines changes from D1 to D2. Also, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive patterns, the display of the concentration lines ends (is not displayed), so the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIG. 14-34, after the end of the temporary stop suggestion display, that is, during the temporary stop notification display period, the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbols is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols by drawing image data 1. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbols is then switched to being displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 14-35). The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 193SG is an image whose transparency is set to 0%.

In other words, during the temporary stop notification performance period, the convergence lines are temporarily hidden, making the left and right decorative patterns more visible than during the temporary stop suggestion performance period (visibility: medium), but the left and right decorative patterns become invisible due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image across the entire display area of the image display device 5 (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the display of the provisionally stopped pseudo consecutive symbols in the image data 2 ends, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed moving toward the player (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) at a speed V2 by drawing the image data 2. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed moving (enlarged) over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so the pseudo consecutive symbols on the left and right are again invisible.

In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the moving display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 (variable display) are not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 193SG will be explained based on Figures 14-35 to 14-47.

First, if it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 14-35(A) to 14-35(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from the top to the bottom at a speed of V1 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a convergence line from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). The convergence line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of the display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time has passed.

If the variable display is a variable display according to the normal reach miss variable pattern PA2-1 that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward on the image display device at a speed V2 without temporarily stopping and become invisible, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (D). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4, PB1-2 to PB1-4), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols, as shown in FIG. 14-35 (E). In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative patterns invisible to the player, and the blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 14-35(G) and Fig. 14-35(H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image is displayed of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding, and as shown in Fig. 14-36(I) and Fig. 14-36(J), an image is displayed of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT", which indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving towards the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-37(K) to FIG. 14-37(P), the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, an image of character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start count notification performance, and blue effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits blue light.

The "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start count notification performance is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size and then hidden (see Figures 14-37 (O) and 14-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start count notification performance ends, the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting blue light and moves from the first performance position to the retreat position. In addition, as the first second variable display start count notification performance, an image of "x2" smaller than the first variable display start count notification performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5.

A short time after the first second variable display start count notification effect ends, as shown in Figures 14-38 (R) to 14-38 (T), the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, resulting in a reach, and then, as a second provisional stop suggestion effect, pseudo consecutive symbols move from above to below in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed of V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Note that the converging line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 over a certain period of time.

If the variable display is a normal reach miss variation pattern PA2-2 that executes the pseudo consecutive performance only once or a normal reach big win variation pattern PB1-2, the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop but moves downward on the image display device at a speed V2 and becomes invisible, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (U). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance two or more times (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 14-38 (V), and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-38 (W) and 14-38 (X), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative patterns on the left and right invisible to the player, and the green light emitted by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 14-38(X) and Fig. 14-38(Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image is displayed of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding, and as shown in Fig. 14-39(Z) and Fig. 14-39(a), an image is displayed of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT", which indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving towards the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-40(b) to 14-40(h), the second re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, an image of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, if it has been decided at the start of the variable display that a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect will be executed, these cut-in preview effects and group preview effects will be executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification performance, and green effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits green light.

The "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification performance is displayed once on the image display device 5, then displayed in a larger size and then hidden (see Figures 14-40(f) and 14-40(g)).

When the first variable display start count notification performance ends, a "x3" image smaller than the first variable display start count notification performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 as the second second variable display start count notification performance.

A short time after the second variable display start count notification effect ends, as shown in Figures 14-41(e) to 14-41(g), the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, resulting in a reach, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols move from above to below in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed of V1 as the third provisional stop suggestion effect. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a convergence line from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Note that the convergence line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time has passed.

If the variable display is a variation pattern PA2-3 of a super reach miss in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed only twice or a variation pattern PB1-3 of a super reach big win, the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop but moves downward on the image display device at a speed V2 and becomes invisible, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (h). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, or PB1-4) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed two or more times, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (i), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in Figures 14-41(j) and 14-41(k), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative patterns invisible to the player, and the red light emitted by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 14-41(k) and Fig. 14-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image of the pseudo consecutive pattern with multiple cracks displayed exploding is displayed, and as shown in Fig. 14-42(m) and Fig. 14-42(n), an image of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving toward the player is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-43(o) to FIG. 14-43(u), the third re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, as a re-variable display notification effect, an image of character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification performance, and red effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits red light.

The "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size (see Figure 14-43 (s) and Figure 14-43 (t)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, a "x4" image smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 as the third second variable display start count notification effect.

Now, we will explain the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. As shown in Figures 14-44(A) and 14-44(B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-repeated pattern moves from top to bottom at speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above, and the converging lines are displayed at density D2. As the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses and the pseudo-repeated pattern approaches the temporary stop position, a pseudo-repeated pattern (a pseudo-repeated pattern drawn with image data 3) different from the pseudo-repeated pattern (a pseudo-repeated pattern drawn with image data 2) moving from top to bottom at speed V1 is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 (the temporary stop position of the decorative pattern), suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-repeated pattern.

If the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 14-44(C), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, causing an effect image for notifying a temporary stop to be displayed around the pseudo consecutive pattern, and the second movable body 193SG033, which has moved from the retreat position to the first effect position, emits light in a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops (number of pseudo consecutive stops) (blue for the first temporary stop, green for the second temporary stop, and red for the third temporary stop). Also, the converging lines displayed on the image display device 5 at this time are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the decorative pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, as shown in Figures 14-44 (D) and 14-44 (E), the pseudo consecutive pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern drawn from image data 3) in the center of the image display device 5 becomes hidden, and the pseudo consecutive pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern drawn from image data 2) that had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1 passes the temporary stop position at speed V2 and moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5 and becomes hidden. At the same time, the normal moving display of the decorative pattern is executed from top to bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the convergent lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 (the number of convergent lines displayed decreases) from the timing when the pseudo-repeated pattern starts to move at speed V2. Then, the convergent lines whose density has changed to D1 are no longer displayed a certain period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 14-44(F) and Fig. 14-44(G), after the convergence lines are hidden, a variable display is performed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C with the decorative patterns other than the pseudo consecutive patterns for a while, then a reach effect is performed according to the variation pattern, and finally a decorative pattern indicating a big win or a miss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature part 193SG, a "1" which is a big win combination, or a decorative pattern with a number other than "1" which is a miss combination stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). In other words, if the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden from the image display device 5, but the convergence lines are hidden before the decorative patterns stop in a big win or miss combination (more precisely, before the reach effect starts).

As described above, with regard to the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 14-45, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are less visible than before the temporary stop suggestion effect was executed due to the convergence lines being displayed at density D1 during the temporary stop suggestion effect (visibility: low). In addition, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are even less visible due to the convergence line density changing to D2 (visibility: medium).

In addition, the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification performance period are more visible during the period from the start of the temporary stop notification performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols) to when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols, than during the temporary stop suggestion performance period (visibility: medium).

In addition, once the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification performance period, it becomes invisible to the player for the remainder of the temporary stop notification performance period (moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns toward the player) and the re-variable display notification performance period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start count notification performance, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative symbols are partially overlapped with the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" displayed in the center of the image display device 5, so that the visibility (medium visibility) is the same as immediately after the start of the temporary stop notification performance.

Then, the decorative symbols on the left and right become invisible to the player as the "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are enlarged (moved towards the player), and these "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. displays switch to small displays in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, making them the most visible (high visibility).

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in Figures 14-36 to 14-37, 14-39 to 14-40, and 14-42 to 14-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect are different (the re-variable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect), but this invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect may overlap in part. For example, as shown in Figures 14-36 to 14-37, when a pseudo-sequence pattern explodes and moves forward and is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo-sequence pattern (for example, the letter "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the display of a character image as a re-variable display notification effect is started on the back side of a part of the pseudo-sequence pattern. By doing this, the image of the character becomes gradually visible to the player as the pseudo consecutive patterns are erased, improving the presentation effect, and furthermore, it becomes possible to transition the image displayed on the image display device 5 without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this characteristic section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 14-35(H) and the like, an image in which a crack appears in a pseudo-repeated pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, and the image itself explodes. However, this invention is not limited to this, and the image with the crack and the image of the explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying an image in which a crack appears in a pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5, an image of smoke or light coming out of the cracks is displayed. Then, the smoke or light image makes it difficult for the player to see the pseudo-repeated pattern, and an image of an explosion is displayed in place of the pseudo-repeated pattern. This also makes it possible to transition the images displayed on the image display device 5 without any sense of incongruity.

Next, if it is decided to execute a special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, a reach will occur a while after the variable display starts, as shown in Figures 14-46 (A) to 14-46 (C). Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, a moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols indicating the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect is executed at a slower speed (speed V1) than normal in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-effect period ends, the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in Figures 14-46 (D) to 14-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound ends, the display of the first special background image begins on the image display device 5, and the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern begins. At this time, if it has been decided at the start of the variable display that a cut-in preview performance or a group preview performance will be performed, overlapping with the re-variable display notification performance.

Then, when the cut-in effect or group preview effect ends, the first second variable display start count notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start count notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-47(I) to FIG. 14-47(N), the second temporary stop of the decorative symbols causes the first special background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed on the second special background image, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner, with a cut-in preview effect, a group preview effect, and a second second variable display start count notification effect being executed, and the third temporary stop of the decorative symbols causes the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed on the third special background image, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner, with a cut-in preview effect, a group preview effect, and a third second variable display start count notification effect being executed. Then, a reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in Figs. 14-33 and 14-34, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is reduced by displaying convergent lines at density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying convergent lines at density D2, thereby increasing the player's anticipation that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop due to the temporary stop suggestion effect. And as a temporary stop notification effect, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative symbols invisible, thereby increasing the excitement of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-44, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns should have temporarily stopped, making it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop, and also easing the player's disappointment that the pseudo-consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-33, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the concentration lines are displayed at density D2 before the timing of switching the display image data, and the concentration lines are displayed at density D1 after the timing of switching the display image data, so the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is higher after the timing of switching the display image data than before the timing of switching the display image data. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the concentration lines after the timing of switching the display image data, the player is made aware that the pseudo consecutive patterns will not temporarily stop, and by drawing attention to the background image through the concentration lines, the player's disappointment that the pseudo consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the convergence lines will be hidden before the decorative symbols that, together with the decorative symbols on the left and right, form a combination that will result in a jackpot or a miss in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, stop, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the stopping of the decorative symbols after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop for a temporary stop.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-35(G) to 14-35(H), when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position, and an image of the pseudo consecutive symbols cracking and exploding (an image of the pseudo consecutive symbols moving towards the player) is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of the exploding pseudo consecutive symbols can give an even stronger impression to the player that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped.

In particular, with this feature 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position as a temporary stop notification performance, so that the pseudo consecutive symbols and a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlap when viewed from the front. This prevents the second movable body 193SG033 from making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols, while giving the player the impression that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example of the transformation of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is shown as an explosion of the pseudo-consecutive patterns, but this invention is not limited to this. Examples of the transformation of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may include the pseudo-consecutive patterns changing into a specific geometric shape (for example, a circle or a triangle) or the size of the pseudo-consecutive patterns changing from before the temporary stop.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first performance position, but this invention is not limited to this. When the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, in addition to or instead of the second movable body 193SG033, the movable body 32 may be moved to the first performance position or a position different from the first performance position, which overlaps with at least a part of the pseudo consecutive pattern when viewed from the front.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-35 (F) and 14-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification presentation, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first presentation position to the retreat position before the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden on the image display device 5, so the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be hidden on the image display device 5.

In addition, the variable display of the characteristic part 193SG can execute pseudo consecutive performances up to three times, and each time the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped and a re-variable display is executed as one of these pseudo consecutive performances, a display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. corresponding to the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification performance. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-37(O), when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and a part of the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. overlap when viewed from the front, so that the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. corresponding to the variable display count can be drawn to, improving the performance effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14-37(O), 14-40(f), and 14-43(s), when displaying "x2" as a variable display start count notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated blue, when displaying "x3" the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated green, and when displaying "x4" the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated red, thereby making it possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the first variable display start count notification effect, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are partially overlapped when viewed from the front. However, this invention is not limited to this, and when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may be completely overlapped.

As shown in Fig. 14-33, Fig. 14-35, and Fig. 14-44, the temporary stop suggestion performance displays a converging line while displaying a pseudo consecutive pattern as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, which makes it easier for the performance control CPU 120 to control the display of the temporary stop suggestion performance, and prevents the switching of image data (switching from the image data shown in Fig. 14-3 to the image data shown in Fig. 14-4) from becoming unnatural at the timing of switching the display image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop. In particular, after the timing of switching the display image data, the pseudo consecutive patterns move downward from the center of the image display device 5, so by displaying the pseudo consecutive patterns in advance as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, the switching of image data at the timing of switching the display image data can be performed in a more natural way that gives an even more uncomfortable feeling to the player.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this characteristic section 193SG, the presentation control CPU 120 can display an image on the image display device 5 by synthesizing the data rendered as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in Figs. 14-3 and 14-4. In particular, the pseudo consecutive patterns as temporary stop images are rendered as image data 1, which has the highest display priority, the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns are rendered as image data 2, which has a lower display priority than image data 1, and the convergent lines as temporary stop suggestion presentations are rendered as image data 4, which has the lowest display priority, so that the degree of freedom of the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns during moving display (variable display), the pseudo consecutive patterns as temporary stop suggestion images, and the convergent lines as temporary stop suggestion presentations can be increased.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIG. 14-35(H), FIG. 14-36(I), and FIG. 14-36(J), when the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and move forward on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, the left and right decorative symbols are not visible to the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-37(O), when "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification effect, the left and right decorative symbols are visible to the player. This enhances the presentation effect of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (particularly the display of "x2" or the like), and since the left and right decorative symbols are visible to the player during the first variable display start count notification effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a re-variable display is being executed.

In addition, the part where the pseudo consecutive patterns shown in Figures 14-35 (H), 14-36 (I), 14-36 (J), etc. explode and move, and the part where the displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. shown in Figures 14-37 (O), 14-37 (P), etc. move, are both moving displays (enlarged displays) facing the player, so these moving displays facing the player can enhance the presentation effects of the temporary stop notification presentation and the first variable display start count notification presentation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-33, in the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data is V1, but the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of switching the display image data is V3, so the player can easily grasp whether it is before or after the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping (before or after the timing of switching the display image data) based on the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, in this characteristic section 193SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the timing of switching the display image data is slower than the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the timing of switching the display image data, but this invention is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the timing of switching the display image data may be faster than the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the timing of switching the display image data.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-34, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping is V1, but the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping is V2, so the player can easily understand whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before or after the temporary stop based on the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in Figures 14-34 and 14-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the provisional stop move from top to bottom, but the pseudo consecutive symbols after the provisional stop move toward the player (the player's side). This makes it easier for the player to tell whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are moving before or after the provisional stop based on the direction of movement, and prevents misinterpretation of the pseudo consecutive symbols' movement display.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is given in which the direction of movement of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is different before and after the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, but this invention is not limited to this, and the direction of movement of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may be the same before and after the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop. Furthermore, the direction of movement of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop does not have to be toward the player (the front side) as long as it is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is slower than the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing, but this invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the number of display frames for displaying the image of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. Also, in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the performance period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed) and the period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed after the display image data switching timing may be different. In other words, in this invention, "the speed at which the specific performance identification information (the pseudo-consecutive patterns in this feature section 193SG) moves is different" includes the number of display frames required to display the pseudo-consecutive patterns being different, and the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed (the performance period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed).

The characteristic features 193SG of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and changes and additions that do not deviate from the gist of this invention are also included in this invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a form was exemplified in which a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion performance to draw the player's attention to whether the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop in the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C), but this invention is not limited to this. As shown in Fig. 14-48(A) to Fig. 14-48(D) as a modified example 193SG-1, a concentration line may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and the concentration line may be moved toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion performance (the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5). In this way, the player can identify that the pseudo consecutive symbols may stop in the center of the image display device 5, so that if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the player can more easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop.

In addition, in the characteristic part 193SG, a form has been exemplified in which a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion performance, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is illuminated in a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops. However, this invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-2, when a temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line may be displayed on the image display device 5 in a color corresponding to the number of times the temporary stop suggestion performance is executed. For example, when the first temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in blue, when the second temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in green, and when the third temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in red. In this way, when the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated as a temporary stop notification performance, the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated in the same color as the concentration line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion performance, so that the performance effect can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, a form in which a cut-in preview effect and a group preview effect can be executed as preview effects that suggest that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-3, as a preview effect, for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display from the timing of the start of the variable display or the timing of the re-variable display when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped may be executed.

In this way, when it is possible to execute an effect that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display as a preview effect, the execution of the preview effect may be restricted if the display of "x2", "x3", or "x4" is moved (enlarged) toward the player as the first variable display start count notification effect. This prevents the player from becoming unaware that the re-variable display will be executed as a result of the execution of the preview effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a form in which the re-variable display is executed on the image display device 5 without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo consecutive patterns from the player's perspective is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a visibility-impeding image (e.g., an image of an explosion) that reduces the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive patterns on the image display device 5 may be displayed, and the re-variable display may be executed after the visibility-impeding image is made non-display. In this way, the visibility-impeding image is displayed before the re-variable display is executed, making it easy to understand that the re-variable display is being executed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate made of a transparent plate material capable of displaying the above-mentioned visibility-impeding image by shining light from the outer peripheral side may be provided in front of the image display device 5 (at a position between the image display device 5 and the player) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing this, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, the visibility-impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate, making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo consecutive patterns displayed on the image display device 5, thereby improving the impression on the player and enhancing the presentation effect of the visibility-impeding image.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo consecutive symbols always move downward and are not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo consecutive symbols may temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5 after starting to move downward. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data may be made different from the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols when they return to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5, so that the player can easily understand whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before passing through the center of the image display device 5 or after passing through the center of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive patterns pass through the center of the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5, the convergence lines may not be displayed again. By doing so, it is possible to make it even easier for the player to understand that the pseudo consecutive patterns pass through the center of the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, the pseudo consecutive performance can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, a super reach reach performance is executed in the same way as when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, but this invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display (three times in the case of this characteristic section 193SG), a reach performance different from when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, a full rotation reach performance that has a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot than other super reach reach performances) may be executed. Note that when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display in this way, the full rotation reach performance may be executed without going through the re-variable display notification performance after the temporary stop notification performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a pseudo consecutive performance is exemplified in which the pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped in the center (the "middle" decorative performance display area 5C) when the left and right decorative performances show the same numerical value (a reach state), but this invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive performance may be temporarily stopped in a state other than a reach state. Furthermore, as described above, a decorative performance different from the pseudo consecutive performance may be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative performance display area 5C. Note that, for a form in which a decorative performance different from the pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative performance display area 5C as a pseudo consecutive performance, the decorative performance may be temporarily stopped in a specific combination, such as a combination of odd and even numbers such as "135" and "246", or a combination of so-called offset numbers such as "112" and "334".

(Description of Characteristic Part 225SG in the Embodiment of the Invention)
Next, a description will be given of the characteristic part 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as the present characteristic part 225SG). Note that, in the present characteristic part 225SG, the description of the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part described above will be omitted.

The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to a player (e.g., a jackpot gaming state),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance image;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by displaying a specific image displayed on the display means;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
A front-stage effect in which the specific image is moved and displayed (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIG. 15-4(C) to FIG. 15-4(E)),
A first post-stage performance that is a successful mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the execution of the pre-stage performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (G) to FIG. 15-4 (H), a part where a pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped);
A second subsequent performance that is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image continues after the execution of the first performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), a part in which the pseudo consecutive patterns continue to be displayed in a moving manner without being temporarily stopped and are not displayed) can be executed.
This is a characteristic feature of the device.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to grasp whether a suggestive performance is successful or unsuccessful, thereby increasing the interest in the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
In the first stage, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, a portion in which a convergent line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the first latter stage performance, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (G), a part where an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed).
In the second latter stage performance, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F), when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, the translucent effect display can increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and the specific image can be made difficult to see when it is displayed still, reducing the sense of incongruity when it is displayed still and emphasizing that it is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
In the first stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 as modified example 225SG-1, a part where a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in priority to a convergence line),
When the first latter stage performance is executed, an opaque effect display is displayed when the first latter stage performance is executed, so that the specific image is temporarily made difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (G), a portion where an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second latter stage performance is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display in the background of the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and by making it difficult to see when the specific image is displayed still, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the image is displayed still and to emphasize that the image is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
In the first stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 as modified example 225SG-1, a part where a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in priority to a convergence line),
In the second latter stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the specific image is erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-7 (F) to Fig. 15-7 (H) as modified example 225SG-2, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5 due to the moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying an effect display in the background of the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed moving will be displayed still or not, and in the second second stage performance, the interest of the second stage performance is also increased by displaying an effect display from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is erased.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
In the first stage performance, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, a portion in which a converging line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in priority to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the second latter stage performance, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the specific image is erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 15-8 (F) to Fig. 15-8 (H) as modified example 225SG-3, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5 due to the moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying a semi-transparent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether the moving specific image will be displayed stationary or not, and in the second second stage performance, the interest of the second stage performance is also increased by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is erased.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
In the first stage performance, a semi-transparent, highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, a portion in which a convergent line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the first latter stage performance, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transparency effect display having a lower transparency than the high-transparency effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-9 as modified example 225SG-4, an effect image for a temporary stop notification having a transparency of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult for the player to see decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns).
In the second latter stage performance, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying a highly transparent effect display, it is possible to increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether a specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and by displaying a low-transparency effect display when a specific image is displayed still, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of the stopped display and to emphasize that the image is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
The first latter stage performance includes a performance in which the size of the specific image is enlarged compared to the size in the former stage performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-1 and FIG. 15-2, when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, the pseudo consecutive pattern after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 6, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of the specific image displayed in a still state, and to further emphasize that the specific image is displayed in a still state.

The gaming machine of form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the first stage performance increases as the first stage performance progresses (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4(C) to FIG. 15-4(E), the convergence lines move toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 7, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the specific image to be frozen and displayed, and to further increase the interest of the early performance.

The gaming machine of form 9 is
A notice performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 13 ) capable of executing a notice performance that notifies the occurrence of a specific event,
During the period when the effect display is displayed in the first subsequent performance and the second subsequent performance, the execution of the advance notice performance is restricted (for example, as a modified example 225SG-5, a part that restricts the execution of the advance notice performance when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 8, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being reduced by the effects, which would reduce the interest in the preview performance.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the suggestion performance, a first suggestion performance (for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance shown in FIG. 15-11(C) as modified example 225SG-5) in which a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance) is displayed on the display means to perform the first stage performance and the first subsequent stage performance, or the first stage performance and the second subsequent stage performance, and a second suggestion performance (for example, an active display change suggestion performance shown in FIG. 15-11(D) to FIG. 15-11(F) as modified example 225SG-5) in which a second specific image having a display dimension smaller than that of the first specific image (for example, an image of an arrow having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggestion performance) is displayed on the display means to perform the first stage performance and the first subsequent stage performance, or the first stage performance and the second subsequent stage performance,
When executing the first latter stage performance as the first suggestion performance, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B) , a part in the image display device 5 that displays an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% together with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance),
When executing the first latter stage performance as the second suggestion performance, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F), a part in which an arrow image is displayed as an active display change notice performance on the image display device 5 while an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 9, characterized in that
According to this feature, in the second suggestion performance, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is not displayed when the first latter performance is executed, thereby preventing the second specific image, which has a small display size, from becoming difficult to understand due to the effect display.

First, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying the image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 15-1(A) to 15-1(C), 15-2(A) to 15-2(C), and 15-3(A) to 15-3(C), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 15-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance in this feature section 225SG, Fig. 15-2 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and Fig. 15-3 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display an effect image (effect image for temporary stop notification) to notify that the pseudo consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped across the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), the image data 2 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 15-1 (B), 15-2 (B), and 15-3 (A), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display a pseudo-consecutive pattern moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the data is drawn to display the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns at a larger size than when they are moving (as shown in FIG. 15-1(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop is a and the vertical dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. 15-2(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns when temporarily stopped is x (x>a) and the vertical dimension is y (y>b)), and immediately after the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, the data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 225SG) from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(B), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figs. 15-1 to 15-3, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated lines) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (a moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols from top to bottom). Note that the concentrated lines in this feature section 225SG are set to a high transparency (for example, 50%), so that the player can see the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols through the concentrated lines while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed.

As shown in Fig. 15-2(C) and Fig. 15-2(D), immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, the image based on image data 1 (the effect image for the temporary stop notification) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (the pseudo consecutive symbols that have become larger in size than when they were moving due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed before the start of the re-variable display.

The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 225SG has a transparency set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, as shown in Figures 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols invisible to the player, but after a certain period of time has passed, these decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-repeated pattern) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 4 (a moving display of the pseudo-repeated pattern from the center downwards on the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, while the temporary stop suggestion presentation is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 15-1 on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop (see FIG. 14-33 of the aforementioned characteristic unit 193), the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) to image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 15-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 15-4.

First, as shown in Figures 15-4(A) to 15-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first tentative stop suggestion performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from top to bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in Figures 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the center of the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are no longer displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping, becoming hidden, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 15-4 (G) and 15-4 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop. Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily invisible. If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are continuously moved toward the bottom of the image display device 5 without displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification, and then hidden. This makes it easier for the player to understand the success (temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) and failure (non-temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, during the temporary stop indication performance, a converging line with a high transparency is displayed on the image display device 5, which draws the player's attention to whether the moving pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop or not, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transparency of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the top-bottom width dimension is b, whereas the left-right width dimension at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the top-bottom width dimension is y (y>b)). This improves the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns and further emphasizes the temporary stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, but this invention is not limited to this, and the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop may be the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is no longer displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop. However, this invention is not limited to this, and for example, the shape or color of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may be changed from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in Figures 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E), converging lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the converging lines are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop and improving the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop is increased by displaying the converging lines moving toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses, but this invention is not limited to this, and the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop may be increased by changing the color of the converging lines or increasing the number of lines displayed (increasing the density of the converging lines) as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses.

The characteristic features 225SG of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and changes and additions that do not deviate from the gist of this invention are also included in this invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 15-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 15-5(A) to FIG. 15-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in Figures 15-6 (A) to 15-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentration lines on the image display device 5 are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and it is possible to prevent the concentration lines from making it difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are hidden, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move toward the bottom of the image display device without temporarily stopping, and are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 15-6 (G) and 15-6 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, by displaying the convergence lines as an image behind the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive patterns, it is possible to increase the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pattern has temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration lines are hidden and then the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 15-7(A) to 15-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden, while the concentration lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are hidden, up to the timing when the variable display stops.

In this way, as in modified example 225SG-1, the convergence lines are displayed as an image behind the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the convergence lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as in the characteristic part 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern are displayed in priority over the convergence lines, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 15-8(A) to 15-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, the decorative pattern and the pseudo-repeated pattern are displayed as images behind the converging lines, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop, the converging lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns are temporarily made invisible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 15-9(A) to 15-9(C) as modified example 225SG-4, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance lower than that of the converging lines (for example, 20%).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 15-10, during the period when the concentration lines are displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period up to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency of the concentration lines is high (for example, the aforementioned 50%), allowing the player to easily see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns through the concentration lines, while during the period when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect (the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency is lower than that of the concentration lines (for example, the aforementioned 20%), making it more difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns than during the period when the concentration lines are displayed.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, a converging line with a relatively high transparency is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification can be used to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, a form in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo consecutive effects during the variable display has been exemplified, but this invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a preview effect (see FIG. 14-29 in the characteristic section 193SG) that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot may be executed as an effect different from these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects. Note that these preview effects may be executed when a convergence line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the execution of the preview effect may be restricted when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. In this way, the execution of the preview effect can draw the player's attention to whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and by restricting the execution of the preview effect when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview effect from being reduced by the effect image for the temporary stop notification, which reduces the interest of the preview effect.

Also, as a preview effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 15-11 as modified example 225SG-5, for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that when a pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop again as a result of the next pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, an active display area 225SG005F that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display at a specified position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device), and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display will change may be executed.

In this way, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, for example, as shown in Figures 15-11 (A) to 15-11 (C), an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect begins from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, but the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect becomes visible to the player from the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden.

On the other hand, when an active display change preview performance is executed as a preview performance, as shown in Figure 15-11 (A) and Figures 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F), an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and an image of the active display change preview performance (in this modified example 225SG-5, an image of an arrow with a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) flying from the right part of the image display device 5 toward the active display area 225SG005F) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (E), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, causing the display mode of the active display to change. When the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (F), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 passes toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display, and then becomes invisible.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 along with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, making the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect temporarily invisible to the player, whereas when an active display change preview effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and an image (arrow image) with a shorter display dimension than the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is displayed as the image for the active display change preview effect, thereby preventing the active display change preview effect from being obscured by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. However, this invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency other than 0% (for example, a transparency of 20% or 50%) may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 together with the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect.

(Description of Characteristic Part 225SG in the Embodiment of the Invention)
Next, a characteristic part 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as the present characteristic part 225SG) will be described. Note that, in the present characteristic part 225SG, the description of the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part described above will be omitted.

First, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on instructions from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying the image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 15-1(A) to 15-1(C), 15-2(A) to 15-2(C), and 15-3(A) to 15-3(C), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 15-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance in this feature section 225SG, Fig. 15-2 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and Fig. 15-3 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display an effect image (effect image for temporary stop notification) to notify that the pseudo consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped across the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), the image data 2 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 15-1 (B), 15-2 (B), and 15-3 (A), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display a pseudo-consecutive pattern moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the data is drawn to display the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns at a larger size than when they are moving (as shown in FIG. 15-1(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop is a and the vertical dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. 15-2(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns when temporarily stopped is x (x>a) and the vertical dimension is y (y>b)), and immediately after the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, the data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 225SG) from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(B), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figs. 15-1 to 15-3, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated lines) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (a moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols from top to bottom). Note that the concentrated lines in this feature section 225SG are set to a high transparency (for example, 50%), so that the player can see the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols through the concentrated lines while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed.

As shown in Fig. 15-2(C) and Fig. 15-2(D), immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, the image based on image data 1 (the effect image for the temporary stop notification) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (the pseudo consecutive symbols that have become larger in size than when they were moving due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed before the start of the re-variable display.

The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 225SG has a transparency set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, as shown in Figures 15-2 (C) and 15-2 (D), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols invisible to the player, but after a certain period of time has passed, these decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (C), the image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-repeated pattern) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 4 (a moving display of the pseudo-repeated pattern from the center downwards on the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, while the temporary stop suggestion presentation is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 15-1 on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop (see FIG. 14-33 of the aforementioned characteristic unit 193), the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop (FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2) to image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 15-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 15-4.

First, as shown in Figures 15-4(A) to 15-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first tentative stop suggestion performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from top to bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in Figures 15-4(C) to 15-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the center of the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are no longer displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping, becoming hidden, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 15-4 (G) and 15-4 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop. Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily invisible. If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are continuously moved toward the bottom of the image display device 5 without displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification, and then hidden. This makes it easier for the player to understand the success (temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) and failure (non-temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, during the temporary stop indication performance, a converging line with a high transparency is displayed on the image display device 5, which draws the player's attention to whether the moving pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop or not, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transparency of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the top-bottom width dimension is b, whereas the left-right width dimension at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the top-bottom width dimension is y (y>b)). This improves the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns and further emphasizes the temporary stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, but this invention is not limited to this, and the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop may be the timing immediately before the temporary stop, or the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is no longer displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop. However, this invention is not limited to this, and for example, the shape or color of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may be changed from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in Figures 15-4 (C) to 15-4 (E), converging lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the converging lines are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop and improving the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop is increased by displaying the converging lines moving toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses, but this invention is not limited to this, and the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop may be increased by changing the color of the converging lines or increasing the number of lines displayed (increasing the density of the converging lines) as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses.

The characteristic features 225SG of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and changes and additions that do not deviate from the gist of this invention are also included in this invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 15-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 15-5(A) to FIG. 15-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in Figures 15-6 (A) to 15-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentration lines on the image display device 5 are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and it is possible to prevent the concentration lines from making it difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are hidden, as shown in FIG. 15-6 (F), and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move toward the bottom of the image display device without temporarily stopping, and are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 15-6 (G) and 15-6 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, by displaying the convergence lines as an image behind the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive patterns, it is possible to increase the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pattern has temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration lines are hidden and then the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 15-7(A) to 15-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden, while the concentration lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are hidden, up to the timing when the variable display stops.

In this way, as in modified example 225SG-1, the convergence lines are displayed as an image behind the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the convergence lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as in the characteristic part 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern are displayed in priority over the convergence lines, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 15-8(A) to 15-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, the decorative pattern and the pseudo-repeated pattern are displayed as images behind the converging lines, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop, the converging lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns are temporarily made invisible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 15-9(A) to 15-9(C) as modified example 225SG-4, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance lower than that of the converging lines (for example, 20%).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 15-10, during the period when the concentration lines are displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency of the concentration lines is high (for example, the above-mentioned 50%), so that the player can easily see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns through the concentration lines, while during the period when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency is lower than that of the concentration lines (for example, the above-mentioned 20%), so that the player may find it more difficult to see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns than during the period when the concentration lines are displayed. Although not specifically shown in this modified example 225SG-4, if the pseudo-repeated patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, as in other characteristic parts and modified examples.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, a converging line with a relatively high transparency is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification can be used to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, a form in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo consecutive effects during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 225SG-5, a preview effect (see FIG. 14-29 in the characteristic section 193SG) that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot may be executed as an effect different from these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects during the variable display. Note that these preview effects may be executed when a convergence line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the execution of the preview effect may be restricted when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. In this way, the execution of the preview effect can draw the player's attention to whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and by restricting the execution of the preview effect when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview effect from being reduced by the effect image for the temporary stop notification, which reduces the interest of the preview effect.

Also, as a preview effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 15-11 as modified example 225SG-5, for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that when a pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop again as a result of the next pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, an active display area 225SG005F that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display at a specified position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device), and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display will change may be executed.

In this way, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, for example, as shown in Figures 15-11 (A) to 15-11 (C), an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect begins from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, but the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect becomes visible to the player from the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden.

On the other hand, when an active display change preview performance is executed as a preview performance, as shown in Figure 15-11 (A) and Figures 15-11 (D) to 15-11 (F), an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and an image of the active display change preview performance (in this modified example 225SG-5, an image of an arrow with a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) flying from the right part of the image display device 5 toward the active display area 225SG005F) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (E), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, causing the display mode of the active display to change. When the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (F), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 passes toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display, and then becomes invisible.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 along with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, making the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect temporarily invisible to the player, whereas when an active display change preview effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and an image (arrow image) with a shorter display dimension than the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is displayed as the image for the active display change preview effect, thereby preventing the active display change preview effect from being obscured by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. However, this invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency other than 0% (for example, a transparency of 20% or 50%) may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 together with the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect.

In addition, in the feature 193SG and the feature 225SG, a pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) that notifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern, but this invention is not limited to this. For example, by changing the display mode of the reserved memory display or the like at the timing of the end of the variable display, it is possible to execute a reserved memory display change performance that suggests that the variable display result corresponding to the reserved memory display will be a jackpot, and a case may be provided in which a pattern (reserved memory display change notification pattern) indicating that the reserved memory display will change is stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. In this way, when the reserved memory display change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, it is possible to execute a performance (suggestion performance in this invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature 193SG or the feature 225SG, targeting whether or not the reserved memory display change notification pattern stops.

In addition, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) that notifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative patterns, but this invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, and to suggest the rate at which the variable display result being executed will be a jackpot according to the background image being displayed, and to provide a case in which a pattern (background image change notification pattern) indicating that the background image will change is stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative patterns. In this way, when the background image change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, it is possible to execute a performance (suggestion performance in this invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature unit 193SG or the feature unit 225SG, with the background image change notification pattern stopping or not.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

In addition, although this specification has given examples of multiple characteristic features and variations as configurations of the gaming machine of this invention, the gaming machine of this invention may be implemented by combining these multiple characteristic features and variations, or may implement only one characteristic feature or variation.

For example, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a form has been exemplified in which a symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) that indicates that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one symbol out of a plurality of decorative symbols, or as a symbol different from the decorative symbols, but this invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a combination of decorative symbols (stopping symbols), and to execute a performance (suggestion performance in this invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature unit 193SG or the feature unit 225SG for the stopping of a symbol that suggests that a specific setting value has been set.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of releasing gaming media at specific intervals, variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, and deriving and displaying a display result, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a favorable state for a player,
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect as a variable display, in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggested performance execution means capable of executing a suggested performance that suggests that the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies the user that the specific performance identification information has been temporarily stopped,
When the round of play is being played, a given amount display regarding the given amount of gaming value is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined display is not displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount, and a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed;
The predetermined period is a period not longer than the specific interval,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance.
A gaming machine characterized by: A gaming machine capable of releasing gaming media at specific intervals, variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information, and controlling the display result to be advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
A control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state;
a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect in which, as a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, the specific effect is resumed after temporarily suspending the display of special identification information different from the effect identification information;
A suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies the user that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped,
When the round of play is being played, a given amount display regarding the given amount of gaming value is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the predetermined display is not displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount, and a count-up display corresponding to the award of the game value is performed, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed;
The predetermined period is a period not longer than the specific interval,
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance.
A gaming machine characterized by: